2002 (Merritt) NTG 4 The Laymen

HAMILTON BOOKS
4501 Forbes Blvd., Suite 200, Lanham, MD

20706 •1-800-462-6420 • www.rowman.com
rowman.com
Special 30% discount offer!
New Testament Greek for Laymen: An

Introductory Grammar
♦♦♦
Michael A. Merritt
“This is an interesting approach with lots of helpful features for students at
every stage of their progress in the better understanding of the text of the
New Testament.”
—W.G. Morrice, Edinburgh
ABOUT THIS BOOK

New Testament Greek for Laymen is an introduction to New Testament Greek designed for the non-specialist—the
average person who would like to study the language of the New Testament, but may not have the opportunity to do
so in college or at seminary. A central feature of the text is the “Verses for Application” section, which is designed to
get the student into the original text of the New Testament by focusing on verses in the Greek text that illustrate the
grammatical points covered in a given lesson.
ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Michael A. Merritt teaches New Testament Greek as a continuing education course. He is an Analyst with the
Department of Defense.
Paperback: ISBN 978-0-7618-2319-3 September 2002 Regular price: $64.99 / After discount: $45.49
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Preface
Chapter 2 Introduction
Chapter 3 The Greek Alphabet
Chapter 4 The Greek Verb System: Present Active Indicative
Chapter 5 The Greek Case System: Second Declension Nouns
Chapter 6 First Declension Nouns
Chapter 7 Adjectives and Adverbs
Chapter 8 Prepositions
Chapter 9 Personal Pronouns
Chapter 10 Demonstrative Pronouns, Conjunctions, and Particles
Chapter 11 Present Passive and Middle Indicative
Chapter 12 Deponent Verbs
Chapter 13 Imperfect Active and Middle/Passive Indicative
Chapter 14 Future Active and Middle Indicative
Chapter 15 Aorist and Future Passive Indicative
Chapter 16 Third Declension Nouns
Chapter 17 Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative
Chapter 18 Contract Verbs
Chapter 19 The Infinitive
Chapter 20 Introduction to Participles: Present Participles
Chapter 21 Aorist Participles
Chapter 22 Perfect Participles, Genitive Absolute, Periphrastic Constructions
Chapter 23 The Subjunctive Mood: Conditional Sentences
Chapter 24 Imperative Mood
Chapter 25 Additional Pronouns and Numerals
Chapter 26 Irregular Adjectives and Comparison of Adjectives
Chapter 27 Conjugation Verbs
Chapter 28 The Article
Chapter 29 Appendices
Chapter 30 General Rule of Accent
Chapter 31 Glossary of Grammar Terms
Chapter 32 Greek-English Vocabulary
Chapter 33 Principal Parts of Greek Verbs
30% Discount
To get discount, use code HAM30AUTH19 when ordering.
*May not be combined with other offers and discounts, valid until 11/30/2019.
THREE CONVENIENT WAYS TO ORDER:

 Online: https://rowman.com/Page/Hamilton
 Call toll-free: 1-800-462-6420
 Email: orders@rowman.com
*All orders from individuals must be prepaid. Prices are subject to change without notice. Billing is in US
dollars. Discount applies to these ISBNs only and may not be combined with any other offers.eBooks must be
ordered online only at www.rowman.com/ebooks. You may use the promo code Ham30AUTH19 for the
30% discount there.
NEW TESTAMENT
GREEK FOR LAYMEN
An Introductory Grammar
MICHAEL A. MERRITT
University Press of America, Inc.

Lanham New York Oxford
Copyright © 2002 by
University Press of America,® Inc.
4720 Boston Way
Lanham, Maryland 20706
All rights reserved

Printed in the United States of America
British Library Cataloguing in Publication Information Available
All Greek Scripture is taken from the Greek New Testament, Fourth
Revised Edition, edited by Barbara Aland, Kurt Aland, Johannes
Karavidopoulos, Carlo M. Martini, and Bruce M. Metzger, © 1993
Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft, Stuttgart. Used by permission of the
American Bible Society, New York, NY 10023 www. americanbible.org.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Merritt, Michael A.
New Testament Greek for laymen : an introductory grammar /
Michael A. Merritt.
p. cm.
Includes index.
1. Greek language, Biblical—Grammar. 2. Bible. N.T.—
Language, style. I. Title.
PA817.M47 2002
487’.4—dc21 2002020405 CIP
ISBN 978-0-7618-2319-3
This text is dedicated, with love, to my wife,
Kathy
best friend and helpmeet

(page iv blank)
Contents
Preface vii
Introduction ix
1. The Greek Alphabet 1

2. The Greek Verb System: Present Active Indicative 11
3. The Greek Case System: Second Declension Nouns 19
4. First Declension Nouns 29
5. Adjectives and Adverbs 35
6. Prepositions 43
7. Personal Pronouns 49
8. Demonstrative Pronouns, Conjunctions, and Particles 57
9. Present Passive and Middle Indicative 63
10. Deponent Verbs 69
11. Imperfect Active and Middle/Passive Indicative 75
12. Future Active and Middle Indicative 81
13. Aorist Active and Middle Indicative 87
14. Aorist and Future Passive Indicative 95
15. Third Declension Nouns 101
16. Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative 111
17. Contract Verbs 119
18. The Infinitive 127
19. Introduction to Participles: Present Participles 135
20. Aorist Participles 145
21. Perfect Participles, Genitive Absolute, Periphrastic
Constructions 153
22. The Subjunctive Mood: Conditional Sentences 161
23. Imperative Mood 171
24. Additional Pronouns and Numerals 179
25. Irregular Adjectives and Comparison of Adjectives 189
vi
26. -mi Conjugation Verbs 195

27. The Article 203
Appendices
General Rules of Accent 211
Glossary of Grammar Terms 215
Greek-English Vocabulary 225
Principal Parts of Greek Verbs 241
Subject Index 255

vii
Preface
T here are a number of excellent grammars available to the beginning

New Testament Greek student, so why should I presume to offer yet
another? Over the past eight years I have had the privilege to teach New
Testament Greek to fellow believers at my home church, and in the
surrounding community. During that time I have come to feel a burden
for the non-specialist, the average Christian who would like to study the
original language of the New Testament but is not likely to have the
opportunity to do so in college or at seminary. When I studied New
Testament Greek under the former Pastor of our church, it revitalized
my own personal Bible study. Developing the ability to work in the
Greek text sharpened my focus and provided deeper insight into the
meaning of New Testament passages. Although this text is well-suited
for use in the college or high school classroom, its main purpose is to
provide believers in local churches with an important tool to aid them in
their personal study of Gods Word.
This text contains many features that are typical of beginning New
Testament Greek grammars, but there are some differences. I have cho-
sen not to use verses from the New Testament in the grammar sections
until well into the later chapters of the text and the exercises consist of
sentences illustrating the principles of grammar points presented rather
than actual verses from the New Testament, in order to avoid using
vocabulary and grammar that have not yet been covered in the course.
However, a section called Verses for Application has been added,
beginning with Chapter 5. These verses have been selected because they
illustrate grammatical points covered during that particular chapter. Stu-
dents will not be familiar with all the words and grammatical nuances
contained in these verses, but this portion of the chapter is designed to be
covered in class, when the instructor can guide them through the por-
tions that would prove difficult for them if they were translating the
viii Preface
verses as homework. Also, in some cases only English translations of

verses are used when illustrating certain points of grammar, but the
students can refer to the verses in the text itself when those grammar
sections are covered in class.
All Greek Scripture is taken from the Greek New Testament, Fourth
Revised Edition, edited by Barbara Aland, Kurt Aland, Johannes
Karavidopoulos, Carlo M. Martini, and Bruce M. Metzger, © 1993
Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft, Stuttgart. Used by permission of the Ameri-
can Bible Society, New York, NY 10023 www.americanbible.org.
A work of this sort is never produced in a vacuum. In developing
this text I have been influenced by my own Greek teachers. I am grateful
to Dr. Al Knoblock, Jr., for introducing me to the world of the Greek
New Testament, and to Winfield Bible Chapel for giving me the oppor-
tunity to teach it. I am also indebted to the many Greek scholars who
have contributed to my understanding of Greek through the fine gram-
mars they have written over the years. I would especially like to ac-
knowledge Ray Summers, Thomas Sawyer, George Hadjiantoniou, Wil-
liam Mounce, Daniel Wallace, and David Black. These men have greatly
influenced my approach to the study and teaching of New Testament
Greek. My heartfelt thanks go to Richard and Kay Bunk, Diane Cruz,
and Cindy Harmon for allowing me to use this text in class over the past
two years. Their suggestions and comments have made it a better prod-
uct. I also would like to thank Marcy Thorner for her superb editorial
assistance, and Dorothy Albritton for preparing the text for publication.
Whatever problems or errors remain are entirely my own responsibility.
May this text bring honor to God and to his Son, Jesus Christ.
Michael A. Merritt
Eldersburg, Maryland
January 2002
ix
Introduction
T he ancient Greek language consisted of a number of dialects that

were linked to specific geographic areas. One of these, the Attic
dialect that was spoken in Athens, gained prominence over the others. It
formed the basis of the official Greek language at the time that Alexander
the Great began his conquest of the ancient world. As Alexander moved
into a new area of conquest, he brought the Greek language with him and
it acted as a unifying force within his empire. As Greek came into con-
tact with the native dialects and languages of these areas it naturally
underwent some changes. The language that evolved during this period
is called Koine, or common, Greek: common in the sense that it
was the language of both commerce and everyday life in the Greek-
speaking world from about 300 B.C. to 500 A.D. It is no accident that
the New Testament was written, not in the literary language of classical
Athens or in a so-called Holy Ghost language devised solely for that
purpose, but rather in Koine Greek, the universal language of the day.
Consider this: wherever Paul traveled during his missionary journeys,
he could be understood. It is significant to note that Paul, a Hebrew,
wrote his letter to the Latin-speaking Romans in Koine Greek, the lan-
guage most suited to the spread of the Gospel message in ancient times.
And, of all the New Testament writers, only Luke was a native Greek
speaker.
As in the study of all languages, this text encompasses three broad
areas of language study: orthography, morphology, and syntaxall three
of which are taken from Greek words:
1) Orthography, from the Greek words meaning to write cor-

rectly, has to do with the mechanics of writing. Orthogra-
phy includes the alphabet, accents, breathing marks, and other
distinguishing marks and is introduced in Chapter 1;
x Introduction
2) Morphology, from the Greek words meaning the shape of

words, is the study of the structure and form of words.
Morphology becomes part of our study, beginning in Chap-
ter 2 and continuing throughout the course. We consider
such morphological components as stems, inflection, end-
ings, and augments;
3) Syntax, from the Greek word meaning to arrange together,

considers the ways in which words are arranged together to
form phrases and sentences. Also beginning in Chapter 2,
we learn that a sentence consists of a subject and a predicate
and we examine how the various parts of speech interact to
form sentences and smaller grammatical units.
The study of New Testament Greek can be an important addition to

the Christians tool kit, one that even laymen, or non-specialists, can
bring to their study of Gods Word. Working in the original language of
the New Testament will enable the believer to bring into sharper focus
many passages of Scripture, as well as answer such questions as:
1) When Jesus says in Mt. 26:27, Drink ye all of it, (KJV)

does all refer to all the communion drink or to all the
people? The grammatical usage of the Greek word all
clearly indicates that it refers to all the people (see Chapter
25).
2) In 1 Jn. 3:9, when John says Whoever is born of God doth

not commit sin (KJV), is he saying that Christians do not
sin? This would appear to contradict what John said in 2:1 :
If any man sin, we have an advocate with the Father, Jesus
Christ the righteous (KJV). An examination of the verb
tenses used in these verses resolves the apparent contradic-
tion. By using the present tense in 3:9, Johns point is that a
Christian will not sin continually. In other words, he or she
will not live in sin. The use of the aorist tense in 2:1 indi-
cates that on those occasions when Christians do sin, they
have Jesus Christ as their advocate with the Father (see Chap-
ter 18).
Introduction xi
3) In Mt. 6:13, why do some English versions say deliver us

from evil (KJV, NASB), and others say deliver us from
the evil one (NIV)? As we will see later in the course, the
presence of the article (the) indicates that the evil one
(Satan), rather than evil in general, is in view. This is also
supported by the context of the early chapters of the book of
Matthew (see Chapter 5).
4) In James 2:14, when James asks, Can faith save him?

(KJV), does James expect to receive yes or no for an
answer? The Greek construction expects a no answer. Does
that mean, then, that faith cannot save? No, because a care-
ful analysis of the context of the passage indicates that James
is saying that a certain kind of faith, that is, a false or spuri-
ous faith, cannot save (see Chapters 24 and 27).
The mention of context brings us to the final point of this intro-

duction. A common thread that will run throughout this course is the
importance of context, that is, the circumstances surrounding a word,
sentence, or verse. To obtain the clearest and most accurate meaning of
a Greek word we must take into consideration not only its form and how
it is arranged with other words, but also its context. How does it fit with
what has gone before and what comes after? When considering a spe-
cific word in the Greek New Testament it is often necessary to consider
what meaning fits the context not only of the verse, but also how it is
used elsewhere in the passage, chapter, and/or book. When working in
the Greek text, remember: context, context, context!
When doing the translation exercises at the end of each chapter, it is
suggested that the students also work the grammar, that is, parse all
nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and verb forms and explain the functions
of words: subject, predicate nominative, direct object, indirect object,
type of adjectival and participial usage, etc. Such a practice will rein-
force points of grammar presented in the lessons.
(page xii blank)
Chapter 1
The Greek Alphabet

1.1 The Greek Alphabet
T here are 24 letters in the Greek alphabet. Our word alphabet comes
from the names of the first two of these letters, alpha and beta.
Many Greek letters correspond directly to their English counterparts,
some are quite different, and still others are false friends, that is, they
resemble English letters but are indeed different. Listed below in chart
form are the printed Greek letters, both lower and upper case, the name
of each letter, and the pronunciation of each letter. Note that the pronun-
ciation system presented below only approximates ancient Greek pro-
nunciation, but it is the one traditionally used and it provides a consistent
standard for pronouncing ancient Greek words.
Lower Case Upper Case Name Pronunciation
a A alpha a as in father (long)

a as in bat (short)
b B beta b as in Bible
g G gamma g as in God (1)
(1) Gamma is always pronounced hard as in God, and never soft, as in

gym. Also, when g is followed by another g, a k, or a c, it is pronounced as
n. For example, a[ggelo~ (angel) is pronounced angelos, not aggelos.
2 New Testament Greek for Laymen
d D delta d as in dog
e E epsilon e as in pet
z Z zeta dz as in adz or

z as in zone (2)
h H eta e as in obey
q Q theta th as in thing
i I iota i as in machine (long)

i as in pit (short)
k K kappa k as in kitten
l L lambda l as in light
m M mu m as in man
n N nu n as in name
x X xi x as in relax
o O omicron o as in hot
p P pi p as in paper
r R rho r as in river
s/~ (3) S sigma s as in sun
t T tau t as in tiger
(2) Zeta is pronounced z as in zone when it comes at the beginning of a

word. Otherwise, it is pronounced dz as in adz.
(3) ~ is used only at the end of words (qeov~, lovgo~), never at the beginning
or middle (sw/vzw, kovsmo~)
The Greek Alphabet 3
u U upsilon u as in cute (long)

u as in put (short)
f F phi ph as in phone
c C chi ch as in chemical (4)
y Y psi ps as in taps
w W omega o as in note
1.2 Writing Greek Letters

To learn to write Greek letters correctly, it is helpful to use lined paper
with a dotted line in the middle.
1. The following letters are written on the line:
2. The following letters are written on and partly below the line:
(4) The sound of c more closely approximates the ch in the Scottish
loch or the German ich. This exact sound does not occur in English, but
the ch in chemical comes close. The difference in pronunciation between c
and k is very slight.
3. The following letters are written on and partly above the line:
4. The following letters are written on, partly below, and partly above
the line:
Although you should eventually learn to write the upper case (capi-
tal) letters, the lower case (small) letters are of greater importance. Capital
letters are used in the Greek New Testament only for titles, proper nouns,
at the beginning of paragraphs, and to mark the beginning of a quota-
tion. Sentences begin with small letters unless the first word is a title or
proper name.
1.3 Greek Vowels and Diphthongs

Greek has seven vowels: a, e, h, i, o, u, and w. Of these, e and o are
always short in pronunciation and h and w are always long. The vowels
a, i, and u may be either long or short. Whether these three vowels are
long or short determines the type and placement of the accent mark (see
section 1.9). For the purpose of reading the New Testament, it is not
necessary to distinguish between vowels that can be either long or short
when pronouncing Greek words.
As in English, two vowel sounds often combine to form a single
sound, called a diphthong. The seven common or proper Greek diph-
thongs are:
Diphthong Pronunciation
ai ai as in aisle
ei ei as in weight
oi oi as in soil
ui ui as in suite or quit
au au as in sauerkraut
eu eu as in feud
ou ou as in soup
Greek has another group of diphthongs, sometimes called improper

diphthongs, which consist of a vowel and an iota subscript (from the
Latin for written under). When iota follows a long vowel, it is written
beneath the vowel. Greek has three such iota subscripts: a/, h/, and w/. An
iota subscript has no effect on the pronunciation of a word.
1.4 Greek Consonants

Greek has 17 consonants, which are grouped as follows:
1. Liquids: l, m, n, r
These consonants are termed liquid because they are pronounced

with a smooth, easy flow of breath.
2. Mutes: b, g, d, q, k, p, t, f, c
This group of consonants is further divided according to class and

order as shown below:
Order
Class Smooth Middle Rough
Labials p b f
Dentals t d q
Palatals (gutturals) k g c
Greek consonants are grouped by class, according to how they are

formed. Labials are pronounced with the lips, dentals with the teeth and
tongue, and palatals (gutturals) with the back of the throat. Order simply
refers to how smoothly or roughly the consonant is pronounced.
3. Sibilants: s, z, x, y
Sibilant consonants are pronounced with an s sound. z x, and y

are called double consonants because they are formed by combining a
mute consonant with s.
Although it is not necessary to memorize these groupings of conso-
nants, you should become familiar with them, as you will be need to
refer back to them later in the course.
1.5 Breathing Marks

Greek words that begin with a vowel or diphthong always have a breath-
ing mark. A smooth breathing mark ( j) has no effect on the pronuncia-
tion of a word (ajkouvw = akouoh). However, a rough breathing mark ( J )
means that an h sound is added to the pronunciation of a word (aJmartiva
= hamartia). The breathing mark is placed above a single vowel and
above the second vowel of a diphthong (ajdelfov~, eijrhvnh). If a word
begins with a capital vowel, the breathing mark is placed to the left of
the vowel, as in jIhsou`~. Initial u always has a rough breathing mark
(uJpov), as does the consonant r when it begins a word (rJh`ma). For our
purposes, rough breathing over r does not affect pronunciation. This
phenomenon comes over into English in such words as rhetoric and
rheumatism. Other than initial u and initial r, there is no rule as to
which breathing mark is used. This must be learned as part of vocabu-

lary study. Keep in mind that substituting a smooth for a rough breathing
mark, or vice versa, can change the meaning of a word. For example, ejn
is the preposition in, while e{n is the cardinal number one.
1.6 Punctuation Marks

Greek has four punctuation marks. These were not original to the lan-
guage, but developed gradually over time. In Greek, the period ( . ) and
the comma ( , ) correspond exactly to the English period and comma.
The colon ( : ) corresponds to the English colon or semicolon and is
written above the line. The question mark ( ; ) is written like the English
semicolon, so be careful with this one!
1.7 Diacritical Marks

There are three other diacritical, or distinguishing, marks that you will
find in the printed Greek text.
1. The apostrophe ( j ) in Greek, as in English, indicates the

omission of a letter. Do not confuse this with the smooth
breathing mark, which occurs at the beginning of a word.
When a word (usually a preposition) that ends in a short
vowel is followed by a word that begins with a vowel or
diphthong, the short vowel drops out in a process called eli-
sion and the two words are pronounced as one. And so dia;
aujtou` becomes di aujtou` (through him). The elision is
marked by an apostrophe.
2. The diaeresis ( > ) is placed over the second of two vowels

that stand together to show that the two vowels are pronounced
separately, rather than forming a diphthong, as in Kavi>n
(Cain).
3. The coronis ( j ) shows that two words have been combined

with the resultant loss of a letter or letters, a process called
crasis. The coronis is placed over the contracted vowel to
retain the breathing remark (kai; ejgwv becomes kajgwv). The
coronis should not be confused with the smooth breathing

mark, which occurs only on a vowel or diphthong at the very
beginning of a word.
1.8 Syllables
A Greek word has as many syllables as it has vowels or diphthongs. The
combined vowels of a diphthong form one syllable, not two. For ex-
ample, a[nqrwpo~ has three syllables, dou`lo~ has two syllables, and
aJmartiva has four syllables. Only the last three syllables of a Greek
word can carry an accent (see section 1.9 below). These syllables are
called the ultima, the penult, and the antepenult. The ultima is the last
syllable in a word, the penult is the next to the last, and the antepenult is
the third from the last. A syllable is considered to be long if it contains a
long vowel or diphthong. All diphthongs are considered long for accent-
ing purposes, except when ai and oi are final in a word.
1.9 Accents
Accent marks in Greek originally indicated tone or pitch but we do not
make such distinctions today. For our purposes, the accent mark indi-
cates where the stress is to be placed in pronouncing a Greek word.
Printed editions of the Greek New Testament use three accent marks:
the acute ( v ), the grave ( ; ), and the circumflex ( ` ). The acute accent can
stand on the ultima, the penult, or the antepenult and is used with both
long and short syllables. The circumflex can stand on either the ultima
or the penult and is used only with long syllables. The grave accent can
stand only on the ultima and is used only with long syllables. The grave
accent can stand only on the ultima and is used with both long and short
syllables. The accent mark stands over the vowel of the accented syl-
lable and over the second vowel of a diphthong. When a breathing mark
and an accent stand on the same syllable, the breathing mark precedes
the accent if it is acute and is placed beneath the accent if it is circumflex
(oi[kou, oi\ko~). Consult the appendix in the back of the book for all the
major rules regarding accents, but please do not attempt to memorize
these rulessimply know where to look if you need specific information
about accents.
Accents are important to our study for two reasons. First, they indi-
cate which syllable is to be stressed when pronouncing a word. Simply
stress the syllable that contains the accent mark, regardless of its type.
This will assist you greatly in pronouncing Greek words, especially when
you encounter them for the first time. Second, the accent marks on occa-
sion distinguish Greek words that are otherwise identical. For example,
hJ is the definite article the, while h{ is the relative pronoun who.
The addition of the acute accent mark changes the meaning of the word!
These differences are best learned by observation. At the beginning of
your study of Greek, use accents to assist you in pronouncing Greek
words.
1.10 Exercises
Pronounce the following Greek words:
ajpovstolo~ ajggeliva uiJov~
qavnato~ gunhv Cristov~
sw`ma povli~ poiou`men
fovbo~ iJerou` pathvr
qeov~ fevrw fwnhv
tau`ta dw`ron eijrhvnh
ejrcovmeqa zwhv ejkei`no~

(page 10 blank)
Chapter 2
The Greek Verb System:

Present Active Indicative
2.1 Vocabulary
a[gw I lead
ajkouvw I hear
blevpw I see
ginwvskw I know
gravfw I write
didavskw I teach
ejgeivrw I raise up
e[cw I have
lambavnw I take, I receive
levgw I say, I speak
luvw I loose, I destroy
manqavnw I learn
pevmpw I send
fevrw I bear, I bring
2.2 Some Preliminaries
T he two main parts of a sentence are the subject and the predicate.
The subject is the noun or noun substitute, called a substantive, that
is the topic of the sentencewho or what the sentence is about. For a
sentence to be complete it must not only name the subject but also say
something about the subject. This is the function of the predicate, which
includes the verb and all its dependent words, clauses, and phrases. A
clause is a group of words that contains a subject and a conjugated verb.
There are two kinds of clauses: main (independent) and subordinate (de-
pendent). A main clause expresses a complete thought and can stand
alone as a sentence (Todd opened the gift that I gave him). A subordi-
nate clause cannot stand alone as a complete sentence (Todd read the
book that I gave him). A phrase is a group of two or more words that
expresses a coherent thought, but does not necessarily contain a verb
(under the table, sitting on the ground). The words that make up a
sentence are classified according to the role they play in a sentence.
These categories, called parts of speech, are verbs, nouns, adjectives,
adverbs, pronouns, conjunctions, and particles. Some grammarians also
list the article among the parts of speech. The various parts of speech
follow specific rules that must be learned during the course of language
study.
Unlike English, Greek is a highly inflected language. Inflection re-
fers to a change in the form of a word so as to indicate grammatical
features such as case, gender, number, person, or tense. English relies
mainly on word order, rather than inflection, to indicate how a word
functions in a sentence. In English, inflection occurs mostly in verbs
the meaning of a word is changed by altering its ending: write, writing,
wrote. Greek uses inflection much more than English doesnot only
with verbs, but also with nouns, pronouns, and adjectives. Greek adds
endings or changes the spelling of a word to indicate its grammatical
function in a sentence.
2.3 The Greek Verb System

To understand the Greek language, the student must master the verb
system and so we start our study of Koine Greek by examining this
important part of speech. A verb is a word that expresses action or state
of being: The class is studying Greek. Mr. Johnson is our Greek
teacher. The verb is usually the key word in any sentence and the other
parts of speech in some way relate to the verb. Make the verb your
starting point when you translate a sentence in the exercises or a verse in
the Greek text. The Greek verb has tense, voice, mood, person, and
number.
The Greek Verb System 13
2.4 Tense
Tense is the quality of a verb that describes the action or state of being.
In English, tense refers primarily to the time when the action of the verb
takes placepast, present, or future. The Greek verb indicates both time
of action and kind of action. As to time, the same three choices as in
English are possible. Kind of action, also called aspect, is of far greater
significance to the Greek verb than time of action. There are three kinds
of action in Greek:
1) Progressive action, also called linear or continuous action,

describes action that is in progress: He is believing the Word
of God. It focuses on the process of the action and can also
refer to action that is repeated or habitual in nature.
2) Summary action, also called simple or undefined action, views

the action in summary: He believed the Word of God. It
says nothing about the process of the action or the results of
the action.
3) Perfected action describes the action as having been com-

pleted at some time in the past, with the results of the action
continuing into the present: He has believed the Word of
God. The action took place in the past and the results of
that action continue in present time, that is, at the time of
speaking or writing, he is still believing the Word of God.
For now, we are concerned with progressive action. Summary action

and perfected action will be presented later in the course.
2.5 Voice
Voice is the quality of a verb that indicates the relationship of the subject
of the verb to the action of the verb. Active voice describes the subject as
performing the action: Mike hit the ball. Passive voice presents the
subject as being acted upon: Mike is being hit by the ball. Active and
passive voice are the same in Greek as in English. Greek has a third
voice, called middle, which describes the subject as acting in its own
interest. Middle voice will be covered later in the course.
2.6 Mood
Mood describes the manner in which the action or state of being ex-
pressed by the verb is conceived by the speaker or writerwhether as
fact, assumption, wish, command, etc. There are four moods in Greek:
indicative, subjunctive, optative, and imperative. Only the indicative
mood need concern us at this point. The indicative mood is the mood of
assertion. It asserts that the action is taking place. The indicative can
also be used to ask a question, since a question expects an assertion to be
made in reply. The action expressed by the verb may or may not actually
be occurring. The speaker is simply asserting it to be so. Most New
Testament Greek verbs are in the indicative mood (more than 15,000
occurrences).
2.7 Person
Person is the quality of a verb that indicates whether the subject is speak-
ing (first person: I/we), being spoken to (second person: you/you), or
being spoken about (third person: he, she, it/they). Person is the same in
Greek as in English.
2.8 Number
Number is the quality of a verb that indicates whether the subject of the
verb is singular (one) or plural (two or more). New Testament Greek
usage is the same as English usage.
2.9 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs

Greek verbs may be transitive or intransitive. A transitive verb expresses
action and carries that action over to something or someone other than
the subject. This thing or person is called a direct object. It tells who or
what received the action of the verb (He bought the book). Transitive
verbs may also take an indirect object, a thing or person to or for which/
whom the action expressed by the verb is performed (He gave me the
book). Intransitive verbs ordinarily express a state of being, rather than
action, and these verbs do not take a direct object or an indirect object
(I am going home. He is my brother).
Many verbs can be either transitive or intransitive, depending on
usage: He is reading the book (transitive). He is reading (intransi-
tive).
2.10 Primary vs. Secondary Tenses

There are two classes of tenses in the indicative mood: primary (or prin-
cipal) tenses, which express present or future time and secondary (or
historical) tenses, which express past time. The Greek primary tenses
are the present, future, and perfect, and the secondary tenses are the
imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect. Only the present tense will be pre-
sented at this time.
2.11 Present Active Indicative of luvw

A Greek verb consists of a stem and a personal ending. The paradigm
(example, pattern) verb most often used in teaching New Testament Greek
is luvw because it is completely regular and has all the Greek tense forms.
The present active indicative of luvw is formed by adding the personal
endings to the stem (lu-) as follows:

Singular Plural
luvw I loose, am loosing luvomen we loose, are loosing
luvei~ you loose, are loosing luvete you loose, are loosing
luvei he/she/it looses, is loosing luvousi(n) they loose, are loosing
1) The present active indicative endings are the primary active tense
endings. You will see them again.
2) The stem is the part of the verb that remains unchanged and to which
the personal endings are added. To obtain the present stem of any
verb in the vocabulary study, simply remove the w from the present,
active, indicative, first person, singular form.
3) In English, a noun or personal pronoun (I, we, etc.) is needed to

indicate the subject of a verb (I am loosing. The man is loos-
ing.). Otherwise, the subject of the verb would be uncertain. In
Greek, no expressed subject is needed because the ending of the
verb, called a personal ending, itself singles out the subject. For
example, luvw means I am loosing and can stand alone as a com-
plete sentence. Greek has personal pronouns, but they are used with
the verb mainly for the purpose of emphasis (See Chapter 7).
4) A verb must agree with its subject in person and number. If the
subject is singular, the verb must be singular. If the subject is third
person, the verb must be third person, etc. In English, we would not
say, The man are reading a book, but The man is reading a
book, so that the subject would agree with the verb in person and
number. The same is true in Greek.
5) English makes no distinction between the second person singular

and the second person plural. Both are rendered you are loosing.
In Greek, the personal ending of the verb distinguishes between the
second person singular and plural forms.
6) Accent in verbs is recessive and will move as far toward the begin-
ning of a word as possible.
7) A n, called a moveable n is often added to the third person plural

form of the present active indicative (e.g., luvousin). A moveable n
may also appear at the end of words that end in si or e, when fol-
lowed by a word that begins with a vowel or at the end of a sentence.
Apparently, this was done as a matter of euphony, that is, it makes
for a more pleasant sound and is easier to pronounce. It corresponds
to the English letter n added to the indefinite article a when it is
followed by a word that begins with a vowel (an apple). The move-
able n occurs in most, but not all, of the above-mentioned cases.
Simply be aware of it and do not allow it to throw you off track when
translating from Greek into English.
2.12 Uses of the Present Tense

The present tense expresses action that is progressive (in progress), con-
tinuous, or repeated in present time. To underscore the progress, or the
continuous nature, of the action, luvw may be translated as I am loos-
ing, rather than I loose. Choose whichever translation seems more
readable in a given context, but always keep in mind the progressive,
continuous nature of the Greek present tense.
2.13 Conjugation and Parsing

The inflection of verbs is called conjugation, which presents all the forms
of a verb in a particular tense, voice, and mood for each person and
number. Greek verbs are divided into two basic conjugations: the -w
conjugation, so called because the present, active, indicative, first per-
son, singular ends in w, and the -mi conjugation. Most Greek verbs are
of the -w conjugation. -mi conjugation verbs are presented later in the
course.
To parse (analyze) a Greek verb is to identify it with regard to tense,
voice, mood, person, number, and source (lexical form). The lexical
form of a Greek verb is the present, active, indicative, first person,
singular form of the verb. This is how a Greek verb is listed in a dictio-
nary or lexicon and not in the infinitive, as in English. To parse the verb
luvei~ we would say: present (tense), active (voice), indicative (mood),
second (person), singular (number), from luvw (lexical or dictionary form).
2.14 Principal Parts of Greek Verbs

The present active indicative is the first principal part of the Greek verb.
The principal parts of a verb are the forms from which tense stems are
derived. The number of principal parts varies from language to lan-
guage. Greek verbs normally have six principal parts, which are pre-
sented during the course of study.
2.15 Exercises
a) Translate the following verb forms:
1. a[gei~, ajkouvw, blevpei
2. didavskomen, e[cete, pevmpousin
3. fevrei, luvei~, ejgeivromen
4. lambavnousi, levgw, gravfei
5. ginwvskete, luvomen, gravfei~
b) Parse the following verb forms:
1. ginwvskei 6. luvete
2. e[cw 7. pevmpousi
3. fevrousin 8. lambavnw
4. ajkouvei~ 9. blevpete
5. gravfomen 10. manqavnei

Chapter 3
The Greek Case System:

Second Declension Nouns
3.1 Vocabulary
a[ggelo~, oJ messenger, angel
ajdelfov~, oJ brother
a[nqrwpo~, oJ man, person, mankind, human being
ajpovstolo~, oJ apostle
a[rto~, oJ bread, loaf
dou`lo~, oJ slave, servant, bondservant
dw`ron, tov gift
qavnato~, oJ death
iJerovn, tov temple
kaiv and, also, even (conj.)
karpov~, oJ fruit
kuvrio~, oJ master, lord, Lord
livqo~, oJ stone
lovgo~, oJ word
naov~, o templeespecially the inner sanctuary and in the
sense of the believers body as a temple of God
novmo~, oJ law
oJdov~, hJ road, way
oi\ko~, oJ house, household
o[clo~, oJ crowd, multitude
potamov~, oJ river
uiJov~, oJ son
* oJ, hJ, and tov are the masculine, feminine, and neuter forms of the definite
article, respectively. See 3.10, below.
3.2 The Noun

As in English, a Greek noun is a word that designates a person, place, or
thing. Nouns can also express an idea or quality, such as justice, and
beauty. Such nouns are called abstract nouns. Greek nouns have de-
clension, case, gender, and number.
3.3 Declension
Greek nouns are grouped into categories, called declensions, according
to their inflection, that is, the manner in which their endings change.
Because English changes the form of a noun only to show possession and
plural number, it does not group nouns according to declension. Greek,
however, has three declensions. The second declension will be discussed
in this chapter and the first declension will be introduced in the follow-
ing chapter. The third declension is presented later in the course. To
decline a noun is to give all its inflected forms in a regular order (see
below, 3.7).
3.4 Case
Declension of nouns is a matter of formthe way they look; case is a
matter of functionwhat they do. In Greek, the case of a noun indicates
its function in the sentence. English has only three cases: subjective,
possessive, and objective, which correspond generally to one or more of
the Greek cases. Greek nouns have five inflected case forms, including
the vocative, but Greek nouns have eight distinct case functions covered
by these forms. Most New Testament Greek grammars present a five-
case system, which corresponds to the five forms: nominative, genitive,
dative, accusative, and vocative. Some grammarians prefer an eight-
case system that is keyed to the specific case function ideas. Although
the five-case system appears to be easier for the student to master be-
cause there is a one-to-one relationship between case and form, the stu-
dent can more clearly see a root idea for each case with the eight-case
system. This text has adopted the eight-case system but will print noun
paradigms so as to accommodate both the five-case and eight-case sys-
The Greek Case System 21
tems. The cases that share the same endings will be listed together in the
declension charts. The basic meanings for the cases, which are the same
for all declensions, are as follows:
1) NOMINATIVE. The nominative is the case of designation,

the naming case. Its main use is to designate the subject of
a sentence or clause. A subject noun tells who or what is
performing the action of the sentence: The students are learn-
ing Greek. Other uses of the nominative case are presented
later.
2) GENITIVE. The genitive is the case of description and it

shows quality. It can also show possession. A house of
stone; The students house (the usual word order to show
possession in English) OR the house of the student (the
usual word order to show possession in Greek.). The En-
glish word of often appears in translation.
3) ABLATIVE. The ablative is the case of separation. It shows

movement away from: The students are coming from the
classroom. The English word from often appears in trans-
lation. The ablative uses the same forms as the genitive case
and is considered to be a function of that case in the five-
case system.
4) DATIVE. The dative is the case of interest or reception. It

can show advantage or disadvantage: He did it for me. A
frequent use of this case is to express the indirect object of a
verb: The students gave a gift to the teacher. The English
words to or for often appear in translation.
5) LOCATIVE. The locative is the case of location or posi-

tion. It shows where someone or something is located. Such
English words as in, on, at, by, etc., often appear
in translation. The locative uses the same forms as the dative
and is considered to be a function of that case in the five-
case system.
6) INSTRUMENTAL. The instrumental is the case of means

or method. It shows how or by what means something is
done: The student is writing with a pencil. The English
words with or by means of often appear in translation.
The instrumental uses the same forms as the dative and is
considered to be a function of that case in the five-case system.
7) ACCUSATIVE. The accusative is the case of limitation. It

identifies the end or the limit of the action. The main use of
the accusative case is to indicate the direct object of a verb:
The students are learning the lesson. It can also show di-
rection or movement: They are coming into the house.
8) VOCATIVE. The vocative is the case of direct address:

Students, please sit down. This case always takes the same
form as the nominative in the plural, but in the singular the
forms are often different. The vocative case is not widely
used in the New Testament. Concentrate on recognizing,
rather than memorizing, vocative forms.
3.5 Gender
Gender indicates whether a noun is masculine, feminine, or neuter. En-
glish has natural gender, meaning that a word takes on the gender of
the object it represents. For example, man is masculine, woman is
feminine, and table is neuter. Greek generally observes natural gen-
der with living beings but it designates some inanimate objects, quali-
ties, etc., as masculine or feminine, and some nouns that refer to living
beings are designated as neuter. This is called grammatical gender, or
assigned gender. As a rule it is not obvious why a particular noun has
a particular gender and the student must learn the gender from vocabu-
lary study.
3.6 Number
Number indicates whether a noun is singular (one) or plural (more than
one). Greek usage here is the same as in English.
3.7 Forms of the Second Declension

The second declension is introduced first because it is the largest declen-
sion and it is the easiest of the three to learn. In the second declension
the o (omicron) sound predominates. Second declension nouns are
mostly masculine and neuter, but there are a few feminines as well.
1. Masculine and Feminine Nouns

The endings of second declension masculine and feminine nouns are as
follows:
Singular Plural
N -o~ -oi
GA -ou -wn
DLI -w/ -oi~
AC -on -ou~
V -e -oi
Singular
Masculine Feminine
N a[nqrwpo~ oJdov~
GA ajnqrwvpou oJdou`
DLI ajnqrwvpw/ oJdw/
AC a[nqrwpon oJdovn
V a[nqrwpe oJdev
Plural
Masculine Feminine
NV a[nqrwpoi oJdoiv
GA ajnqrwvpwn oJdw`n
DLI ajnqrwvpoi~ oJdoi`~
AC ajnqrwvpou~ oJdoiv
2. Neuter Nouns
Second declension neuter nouns differ from masculine and feminine nouns
only in the nominative singular and in the nominative and accusative
plural. The endings of second declension neuter nouns are as follows:
Singular Plural
N -on -a
GA -ou -wn
DLI -w/ -oi~
AC -on -a
V -on -a
An example of a second declension neuter noun is dw`ron:
Singular Plural
NV dw`ron dw`ra
GA dwvrou dwvrwn
DLI dwvrw/ dwvroi~
AC dw`ron dw`ra
As with the verb, the Greek noun consists of a stem, which mostly
remains unchanged, and an ending, which may vary according to case
and number. The stem is obtained by dropping the nominative singular
ending: -o~ for second declension masculine and feminine nouns and
-on for second declension neuter nouns. Also note the following:
1) The nominative and accusative forms of neuter nouns, both

singular and plural, are identical.
2) Throughout a declension the accent in a noun remains on the

same syllable as in the nominative, or as nearly as the gen-
eral rules of accent permit.
3.8 Word Order

In English, case endings have largely disappeared, with the exception of
the possessive (students, teachers) and the plural (man, men). In an
English sentence the function of a noun is normally shown by word
order: The students (subject) see the teachers; The teachers see the stu-
dents (direct object). Alternatively, noun function is indicated by use
with a preposition (to students, for teachers, of the students, etc.). Greek
does have prepositions, which help nouns express their case functions,
but all case functional ideas discussed above can be expressed by the
case form alone, without a preposition. Greek prepositions are intro-
duced in Chapter 6.
In English, normal word order is: subject - verb - object. In Greek,
however, word order is not fixed and it is often changed for purposes of
emphasis, contrast, variety, and even euphony. Remember that case end-
ings, rather than word order determine the function of a word in a Greek
sentence. Never assume that a word is the subject simply because it
appears first in the sentence.
Also note that to ask a question in English, it is necessary to use an
auxiliary (helping) verb: Are you studying Greek? Do you know the
answer to the question? To change a Greek statement into a question,
simply place a question mark ( ; ) at the end of the statement: ginwvskei
to;n a[nqrwpon; (Does he knows the man?).
3.9 Parsing Nouns

To parse a noun is to identify it by declension, case, gender, and num-
ber. Example: lovgonsecond (declension), accusative (case), mascu-
line (gender), singular (number). The lexical form of a noun is its nomi-
native case, singular form. Since the lexical form of a noun is usually
recognizable regardless of its case form, it is not necessary to include it
when parsing. However, it is best to include the lexical forms of verbs
when parsing, because many verb forms bear little resemblance to the
lexical form.
3.10 The Article

Greek has no indefinite article (English a or an), so that lovgo~
means word or a word, and oJ lovgo~ means the word. Generally
speaking, the presence of the definite article (English the) emphasizes
particular identity, whereas the absence of the article emphasizes quality
or characteristics. Although under certain circumstances a Greek noun
that does not have the article is translated as if it did, please note the
following rule of thumb, at least in the beginning stages of this course: if
the article does not appear in translation exercises, the noun should be
translated as indefinite. Also, there are times when the Greek article
should not be translated into English. Proper nouns and abstract nouns
(truth, love, etc.) usually take the article, but it sounds awkward to trans-
late the article into English. Since Greek has only one articlethe defi-
nite definite articlewe will henceforth refer to it simply as the ar-
ticle. Nouns with the article are called articular, and those without
the article are called anarthrous.
The Greek article does not have declension. Masculine forms are
used with all masculine nouns and neuter forms are used with all neuter
nouns, regardless of declension. The article must, however, agree with
its noun in case, gender, and number. The article will be included with
the noun in the vocabulary lists. Keep in mind that in translation the
article can be an important clue in determining the gender of a noun that
is encountered for the first time.
The forms of the article for masculine and neuter nouns are as follows:
Masculine Neuter
Singular Plural Singular Plural
N oJ oiJ tov tav
GA tou` tw`n tou` tw`n
DLI tw`/ toi`~ tw`/ toi`~
AC tovn touv~ tov tav
The forms oJ and oiJ are proclitics, which have no accent of their own
and are pronounced with the words that follow them. See the appendix
on accents for more information on proclitics. Note that the article is not
used with the vocative case. The feminine article will be presented in the
following lesson.
3.11 Exercises
Translate the following sentences:
1. oJ ajpovstolo~ ginwvskei to;n a[nqrwpon.
2. oJ dou`lo~ fevrei to;n karpovn.
3. oJi uiJoi; manqavnousi tou;~ lovgou~.
4. e[cei~ ta; dw`ra;
5. oiJ a[vnqrwpoi ajkouvousi tou;~ lovgou~ tw`n ajdelfw`n.
6. lambavnomen dw`ra karpw`n kai; a[rtou.
7. blevpei to;n ajpovstolon tw`/ iJerw`/.
8. gravfw tw`/ ajdelfw`/.
9. toi`~ ajnqrwvpoi~ oiJ ajpovstoloi levgousi lovgou~ tou` qanavtou.
10. oJ o[clo~ blevpei tou;~ livqou~ tw`/ oi[kw/.
11. pevmpomen dw`ra toi`~ ajggevloi~.
12. oJ uiJo;~ tou` ajpovstolou a[gei tou;~ douvlou~.
13. oJ ajpovstolo~ manqavnei to;n novmon.
14. tou;~ douvlou~ luvousi livqoi~.
15. pevmpei oJ dou`lo~ ta; dw`ra toi`~ ajnqrwvpoi~ kai; toi`~ uiJoi`~.
(page 28 blank)
Chapter 4
First Declension Nouns

4.1 Vocabulary
ajgavph, hJ love
ajlhvqeia, hJ truth
aJmartiva, hJ sin
basileiva, hJ kingdom
glw`ssa, hJ tongue, language
grafhv, hJ writing, Scripture
didachv, hJ teaching
dovxa, hJ glory
eijrhvnh, hJ peace
ejkklhsiva, hJ church, assembly
ejntolhv, hJ commandment
ejxousiva, hJ authority
hJmevra, hJ day
maqhthv~, oJ disciple
Messiva~, oJ Messiah
neaniva~, oJ young man
parabolhv, hJ parable
profhvth~, oJ prophet
Satana`~, oJ Satan
telwvnh~, oJ tax collector
4.2 First Declension Nouns

In the first declension the a (alpha) sound predominates. Nouns of
this declension are mostly feminine, but there are some masculines. As
the vocabulary above indicates, nouns that end in a or h in the nomina-
tive singular are feminine. First declension nouns that end in a~ or h~ in
the nominative singular are masculine.
4.3 Patterns of First Declension Nouns

There are five patterns of singular endings for first declension nouns:
three for feminine nouns and two for masculine nouns. The plural forms
are the same for all first declension nouns.
1. Feminine Nouns
a) When the stem ends in e, i, or r, the nominative singular ends in a,
which is retained throughout the word in all its inflected forms. An ex-
ample is hJmevra:
Singular Plural
NV hJmevra hJmevrai
GA hJmevra~ hJmerw`n
DLI hJmevra/ hJmevrai~
AC hJmevran hJmevra~
b) When the stem ends in s, ll, or one of the double consonants (z, x,
or y), the nominative singular ends in a, which changes to h in the
genitive/ablative and in the dative/locative/instrumental singular forms,
and then changes back to a in the accusative singular. An example is
dovxa:
Singular Plural
NV dovxa dovxai
GA dovxh~ doxw`n
DLI dovxh/ dovxai~
AC dovxan dovxa~
First Declension Nouns 31
c) When the stem ends in any other letter the nominative singular will
end in h, which is retained throughout the singular. This is the most
common pattern of endings for feminine first declension nouns. An ex-
ample is grafhv:
Singular Plural
NV grafhv grafaiv
GA grafh`~ grafw`n
DLI grafh`/ grafai`~
AC grafhvn grafav~
2. Masculine Nouns
A few masculine nouns have first declension endings. They have the
masculine article and all modifiers of these nouns are also masculine.
There are two patterns of endings for masculine first declension nouns.
When the stem ends in e, i, or r the nominative singular will end in a~.
All other stems are followed by h~ in the nominative singular. Examples
are Messiva~ and profhvth~:
Singular Plural
NV Messiva~ Messivai
GA Messivou Messiw`n
DLI Messiva/ Messivai~
AC Messivan Messiva~
Singular Plural
N profhvth~ profh`tai
GA profhvtou profhtw`n
DLI profhvth/ profhvtai~
AC profhvthn profhvta~
V profh`ta
Note that the genitive singular for both Messiva~ and profhvth~
ends in ou. This is probably because of a desire to distinguish between
the nominative singular and the genitive singular of these nouns.
Also note that Satana`~ is declined irregularly:
N Satana`~
G Satana`
DLI Satana`/
AC Satana`n
V Satana`/
4.4 The Feminine Article

First declension nouns have a variety of ending patterns but there is only
one set of endings for the feminine article. Note that the feminine article
is to be used with feminine nouns only. The forms of the masculine
article presented in Chapter 3 are to be used with masculine nouns,
whether they are of the second or the first declension. The forms of the
feminine article are as follows:
Singular Plural
N hJ aiJ
GA th`~ tw`n
DLI th`/ tai`~
AC thvn tav~
Note that the forms hJ and aiJ are proclitics.

First Declension Nouns 33
4.5 Exercises
1. blevpw to;n oi\kon tou` neanivou.
2. levgei oJ ajpovstolo~ parabolh;n toi`~ o[cloi~.
3. ta;~ ejkklhsiva~ didavskei oJ a[ggelo~ kai; ajkouvousi th;n ajlhvqeian.
4. oJ kuvrio~ levgei lovgou~ ajgavph~ th`/ ejkklhsiva/.
5. oiJ uiJoi; tw`n profhtw`n luvousi ta; iJera; livqoi~.
6. ajkouvomen ta;~ didaca;~ tou` Messivou.
7. oiJ a[nqrwpoi ginwvskousi th;n ejntolh;n tou` kuvriou.
8. oiJ maqhtai; levgousi lovgou~ ajlhvqeia~ toi`~ o[cloi~.
9. ajkouvete th;n parabolh;n th`~ basileiva~;
10. oJ dou`lo~ blevpei to;n kuvrion th`/ ejkklhsiva/.
11. oJ ajpovstolo~ gravfei grafh;n th`~ basileiva~.
12. fevromen ta; dw`ra toi`~ neanivai~.
13. th;n eijrhvnhn tou` kuvriou e[cei~;
14. oiJ telw`nai manqavnousi ta;~ grafav~.
15. oJ Satana`~ blevpei th;n dovxan tou` kuvriou.

(page 34 blank)
Chapter 5
Adjectives and Adverbs

5.1 Vocabulary
ajgaqov~, -hv -ovn good
ajgaphtov~, -hv, -ovn beloved
a{gio~, -a, -on holy, set apart (in pluralsaints)
aijwvnio~, -on eternal
a[llo~, -h, -o * other, another (sometimes of the same kind)
a[pisto~, -on unbelieving, faithless
basilikov~, -hv, -ovn royal
divkaio~, -a, -on righteous, just
e{kasto~, -h, -on each, every
e[scato~, -h, -on last
e{tero~, -a, -on other, another (usually of a different kind)
kainov~, -hv, -ovn new
kakov~, -hv, -ovn bad
kalov~, -hv, -ovn good, beautiful
mikrov~, -av, -ovn small, little
movno~, -h, -on alone, only
nekrov~, -av, -ovn dead
pavlin again (adv.)
pistov~, -hv, -ovn faithful, believing
ponhrov~, -av, -ovn evil
prw`to~, -h, -on first
sofov~, -hv, -ovn wise
* The neuter nominative/accusative singular is irregular and drops the n.

5.2 Adjectives
An adjective is a word that modifies or describes a noun or a word that is
used as a noun substitute (substantive). It answers such questions as
what kind? which one? how many? An adjective in Greek agrees with
the word it modifies in case, gender, and number. Although a noun has
only one gender, an adjective must be able to modify a noun of any
gender and so must have endings for all three genders. Although Greek
adjectives do not, strictly speaking, have declension, they are classified
by the patterns of endings they use.
First and second declension adjectives use endings of the first and
second declensions. Masculine and neuter adjectives of this type follow
the patterns of the second declension, and feminine adjectives follow the
endings of the first declension. Examples: ajgaqo;~ maqhthv~, ajgaqh;
hJmevra, ajgaqo;n dw`ron. Note that the ending of the adjective and the
noun may or may not look alike, but they must agree in case, gender,
and number. In the first example above, the noun maqhthv~ is nomina-
tive, masculine, and singular but takes first declension endings. The
adjective ajgaqov~ agrees with maqhthv~ in all required respects but they
do not look the same, because ajgaqov~ takes second declension end-
ings. Likewise, in the example ajgaqh; hJmevra, noun and adjective agree
in case, gender, and number but they do not look the same because they
end in different stems and therefore take different patterns of first de-
clension endings. Adjectives are listed in the vocabulary study without
the article, but with all three gender endings.
5.3 Forms of First and Second Declension

Adjectives
Masculine and neuter adjectives follow second declension endings. Femi-
nine adjectives follow first declension endings as follows:
1. When the stem of the adjective ends in e, i, or r, the nominative

feminine ending will be a, which will be retained throughout the in-
flected forms, as with the hJmevra pattern of nouns.
Adjectives and Adverbs 37
Singular
Masculine Feminine Neuter
N divkaio~ dikaiva divkaion
GA dikaivou dikaiva~ dikaivou
DLI dikaivw/ dikaiva/ dikaivw/
AC divkaion dikaivan divkaion
V divkaie dikaiva divkaion
Plural
NV divkaioi divkaiai divkaia
GA dikaivwn dikaivwn dikaivwn
DLI dikaivoi~ dikaivai~ dikaivoi~
AC dikaivou~ dikaiva~ divkaia
2. With any other stem ending the nominative feminine singular

ending will be h, which will be retained throughout the singular, as with
the grafhv pattern of first declension nouns.
Singular
NV ajgaqov~ ajgaqhv ajgaqovn
GA ajgaqou` ajgaqh`~ ajgaqou`
DLI ajgaqw`/ ajgaqh`/ ajgaqw`/
AC ajgaqovn ajgaqhvn ajgaqovn
V ajgaqev ajgaqhv ajgaqovn
Plural
NV ajgaqoiv ajgaqaiv ajgaqav
GA ajgaqw`n ajgaqw`n ajgaqw`n
DLI ajgaqoi`~ ajgaqai`~ ajgaqoi`~
AC ajgaqouv~ ajgaqav~ ajgaqav
5.4 Two-termination Adjectives

The great majority of adjectives in the Greek New Testament are three-
termination adjectives, meaning they have separate case endings for each
of the three genders. There are also some two-termination adjectives,
which have no separate forms for the feminine. These adjectives use the
masculine forms for both the masculine and feminine. In the vocabulary
study for this lesson aijwvnio~, -on and a[pisto~, -on are examples of
two-termination adjectives. When only two forms for an adjective ap-
pear in the vocabulary lists, the first form covers both the masculine and
the feminine. The second form is for the neuter.
5.5 Uses of the Adjective

The study of the uses of the Greek adjective is crucial to an understand-
ing of a great deal of Greek grammar, as will become clear later. Greek
adjectives are used primarily in three ways: attributively, predicatively,
and substantivally. These functions parallel English usage.
1. An attributive adjective attributes a quality to the noun it modifies or

describes: The good man. Good describes man. The attribu-
tive adjective may appear in two different positions in relation to the
noun it modifies:
oJ ajgaqo;~ a[nqrwpo~ OR
oJ a[vnqrwpo~ oJ ajgaqov~
Although the second example is literally translated the man, the good
one, both examples should be translated the good man. Note that
when the article appears in this construction, it always immediately pre-
cedes the adjective. This is called the attributive position. If there is
no article, context determines whether the adjective is being used
attributively or predicatively.
2. As its name indicates, a predicate adjective appears in the predicate

and makes an assertion about the subject noun: The man is good.
There are two ways of writing this construction in Greek, both of
which omit the article before the adjective. This is called the predi-
cate position:
oJ a[nqrwpo~ ajgaqov~ OR
ajgaqo;~ oJ a[nqrwpo~
Unlike the attributive adjective, the predicate adjective is used as a

complement of the verb to be: The man is good. The verb can be
stated or merely implied in Greek (see Chapter 7).
3. The Greek adjective may also take the place of a noun. This is
called the substantival use of the adjective and it is much more common
in Greek than in English. Examples: Only the good die young. The
meek shall inherit the earth. And so oJ ajgaqov~ means the good man
or the good one, hJ ajgaqhv means the good woman, and to; ajgaqovn
means the good thing. Likewise, in the plural, oiJ ajgaqoiv means the
good men, the good people, or the the good ones. The masculine
plural is used both for a group of all males and for a mixed group of
people, both male and female. aiJ ajgaqaiv means the good women,
and ta; ajgaqav means the good things. In this usage there is no noun
for the adjective to modify and the adjective is almost always accompa-
nied by the article. It should be noted that a susbstantival adjective can
function in any way that a noun can functions: as subject, as direct ob-
ject, as indirect object, with prepositions, etc.
Choosing the correct use of the adjective is crucial to translation.

Keep the following guidelines in mind when attempting to determine
how a Greek adjective is being used:
1. If there is a noun to modify and the adjective is preceded by

the article, the usage is attributive.
2. If there is a noun to modify but the adjective is not preceded

by the article and a linking verb (e.g., to be) is stated or
implied, the usage is predicative.
3. If there is no noun to modify and the adjective is preceded

by the article, the usage is substantival.
Keep in mind that if there is no article in the construction, context

determines the adjectives usage. See 2 Tim. 3:16 in the verses for appli-
cation below.
5.6 Adverbs
An adverb qualifies a verb, adjective, or another adverb by indicating
quantity, time, place, intensity, and manner. When modifying a verb, an
adverb tells when, where, or in what manner the action of the verb
occurs. In the example, He answered the question immediately, the
adverb immediately qualifies the verb answered by indicating when
he answered. In the example, This is a very nice house, the adverb
very qualifies the adjective nice. And in the example, My son did
very well on the exam, the adverb very qualifies the adverb well.
Greek adverbs are not inflected and retain the same form regardless of
their use. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives by adding w~ to the
stem. For example, the adjective kalov~ (good) becomes the adverb
kalw`~ (well). Other adverbs reflect fixed case endings, such as pavlin
(again, which is accusative singular) and au[rion (tomorrow, which
is accusative singular; see Chapter 25). Many other adverbs are formed
irregularly and must be learned from vocabulary study and observation.
5.7 Verses for Application

Mt. 5:3 Rom. 7:12
Mt. 6:13 2 Tim. 3:16
Lk. 6:45 Rev. 1:17
5.8 Exercises
1. ponhro;~ oJ dou`lo~ kai; levgei ta; kakav.
2. oiJ uiJoi; fevrousi kala; dw`ra pavlin.
3. aiJ sofai; ta; ajgaqa; levgousin.
4. kakoi; oiJ lovgoi tw`n ajnqrwvpwn.
5. hJ ejkklhsiva mikrav.
6. oJ divkaio~ maqhth;~ e[cei to;n movnon karpovn.
7. kaino;~ oJ oi\ko~;
8. ejgeivrei oJ kuvrio~ to;n nekrovn.
9. hJ e{tera e[cei to;n movnon ajgaqo;n uiJovn.
10. ajgaqo;~ oJ ajpovstolo~ kai; didavskei tou;~ pistou;~ th`/ ejkklhsiva/.
11. oJ maqhth;~ ginwvskei tou;~ dikaivou~ kai; ta;~ dikaiva~.
12. oiJ uiJoi; prw`toi kai; oiJ dou`loi e[scatoi.
13. oJ profhvth~ luvei tou;~ ajnqrwvpou~ tou;~ ajpivstou~.
14. to;n sofo;n ajkouvete;
15. oiJ uiJoi; manqavnousi th;n movnhn ajlhvqeian.

(page 42 blank)
Chapter 6
Prepositions
6.1 Vocabulary
Prepositions used with one case:
ajnav acc. up, again

ajntiv gen. against, instead of, in place of, for (exchange)
ajpov abl. from, away from
eij~ acc. into, to, in, for, with a view towards, in reference to
ejk abl. out of, from (source), because of (ejx before a vowel)
prov abl. before (time/space), in front of
suvn inst. with, together with
Prepositions used with two cases:
ejn loc. in, on, at, among

inst. with, by means of
metav gen. with
acc. after
periv gen. about, concerning
acc. about, around
uJperv abl. in behalf of, instead of, for
acc. above, over, beyond
uJpov abl. by (agencysee Chapter 9)
acc. under
Prepositions used with three cases:
diav abl. through (agency)

gen. through
acc. because of, on account of
ejpiv gen. on, upon, over (emphasizing contact)
loc. on, upon, at, (emphasizing position)
acc. on, upon, to, up to (motion)
katav abl. down from
gen. down upon, against
acc. along, according to
parav abl. from (the side ofmotion)
loc. before, beside, by the side of (position)
acc. beside, beyond, along, to the side (motion)
prov~ gen. for, for the sake of
loc. at
acc. to, toward, with, for, for the purpose of
6.2 Uses of Prepositions

A preposition is a word that helps nouns and other substantives express
their particular case functions. They help to explain the relation of sub-
stantives to verbs or other words in a sentence. They may also indicate
direction, location, and time. Consider the sentence, The book is on
the table. The preposition on shows the particular relationship be-
tween the nouns book and table. It also shows the location of the
book. The preposition and the substantive with which it is used combine
to form a prepositional phrase (on the table, behind the house).
Strictly speaking, prepositions do not govern cases or take objects. They
are, however, used with one or more cases and some grammarians do
call the substantive that follows a preposition the object of the prepo-
sition. Case functions are much older than prepositions, which were
developed to help express case ideas that were already in use. As noted
earlier in the course, the case functions already learned can be expressed
without a preposition. In English and other languages that are less in-
flected than Greek, prepositions are often needed to express the case
functional ideas of nouns and other substantives.
Prepositions 45
6.3 Prepositions and Compound Verbs

In English, prepositions can be prefixed to verbs in order to form com-
pound verbs. For example, plant becomes implant, score be-
comes underscore, and throw becomes overthrow. A predomi-
nant use of Greek prepositions is to help form such compound verbs.
The seventeen prepositions given in the vocabulary list may be com-
pounded with verbs. Sometimes the meaning of the resulting compound
verb is easily understood, as in the example ajpavgw. The verb a[gw means
I lead, and the preposition ajpov means away. So ajpavgw means I
lead away. But one cannot assume that the meaning of a compound
verb is simply a combination of the meaning of the verb with the mean-
ing of the preposition. For example, ajnaginwvskw means I am read-
ing. It is best to consult a lexicon or dictionary when translating a
compound verb. A preposition in a compound verb is usually repeated
before the noun: eijsfevrei ta; dw`ra eij~ th;n ejkklhsivan (He is bring-
ing the gifts into the church).
6.4 Adverbial Prepositions

The seventeen prepositions presented in this lesson are the true prepo-
sitions in Greek. Prepositions were originally adverbs, and there are
also a number of adverbs found in the New Testament that are used as
prepositions with various cases. Some grammarians refer to them as
improper prepositions. Examples are cavrin (for the sake of, which
is used with the genitive; see Chapter 18) and ejnwvpion (before, in
the presence of, which is also used with the genitive; see Chapter 20).
6.5 Prepositions and the Article

Some Greek nouns are considered to be definite when used with prepo-
sitions and so the article is not needed in such constructions (ejn ajrch`/,
in the beginning). Do not assume, however, that all anarthrous nouns
that follow prepositions are definite. If the noun has the article, it is
definite by definition. If it does not have the article, it may be definite
under certain conditions. A more detailed discussion of the uses of the
article is presented in Chapter 27.
6.6 Translation of Prepositions

Only the basic meanings of Greek prepositions have been given in the
vocabulary study. Both the case used with a preposition and the context
in which it is found should be taken into consideration when translating
a preposition. Since each preposition may have meanings other than those
given in the vocabulary list, it is wise to consult a lexicon or dictionary
before deciding on a final translation for a preposition.
6.7 Accents on Prepositions

Some prepositions do not have accents (eij~, ejk, ejn). They are proclitics
and are pronounced with the words that follow them. Also note that the
accent in a compound verb never stands on the preposition. It goes back
only as far as the first syllable of the verb proper. Examples: ajpavgw,
eijsfevrw.
6.8 Elision in Prepositions

When a preposition that ends in a vowel (with the exception of periv and
prov), is followed by a word that begins with a vowel, elision occurs (see
Chapter 1). The final vowel of the preposition is replaced by an apostro-
phe, except when the preposition combines with a verb to form a com-
pound verb: ajpÆ ejkklhsiva~ but ajpavgw. Note that t and p become q and
f, respectively, before rough breathing: meqÆ uiJou`, ejfÆ aJmartiva/.

Jn. 1:1 Heb. 12:2
Jn. 1:14 1 Pet. 1:3
Also note the use of the preposition katav in the titles of the Gospels and
the preposition prov~ in the titles of Pauls Epistles in the Greek New
Testament.
Prepositions 47
6.10 Exercises
1. oJ maqhth;~ didavskei ejn tw`/ iJerw`/.
2. a[gomen tou;~ douvlou~ eij~ th;n ejkklhsivan.
3. dia; ta;~ grafa;~ tw`n profhtw`n ginwvskomen to;n kuvrion.
4. oJ Messiva~ ejgeivrei tou;~ pistou;~ ejk tw`n nekrw`n.
5. oJ ajdelfo;~ pevmpei tou;~ uiJou;~ ajpo; tou` oi[kou.
6. levgei parabolh;n peri; th`~ basileiva~.
7. lambavnete ta; kala; dw`ra ajfÆ uiJw`n tw`n profhtw`n.
8. oJ profhvth~ levgei lovgou~ kata; th;n ajlhvqeian.
9. fevromen to;n a[rton kai; to;n karpo;n pro;~ tou;~ ajgaqou;~ uiJou;~
tw`n ajpovstolwn.
10. oJ ajpovstolo~ didavskei tou;~ ajnqrwvpou~ su;n toi`~ uiJoi`~.
11. lambavnw to;n kalo;n a[rton ajnti; tou` kakou` a[rtou.
12. oJ a[ggelo~ levgei ajgaqo;n lovgon tw`/ maqhth`/.
13. ejn th`/ hJmevra/ th`/ e[scath/ th;n dovxan tou` kuvriou blevpousin oiJ
ponhroiv.
14. oJ ajpovstolo~ tou;~ o[clou~ para; potamw`/ didavskei.
15. manqavnousin oiJ uiJoi; ta;~ grafa;~ su;n toi`~ douvloi~.

(page 48 blank)
Chapter 7
Personal Pronouns
7.1 Vocabulary
ajpostevllw I send (with a message)
aujtov~, -hv, -ov he, she, it (pronoun)
dev * but, and, moreover; now (conj., postpositive)
didavskalo~, oJ teacher
ejgwv I (pronoun)
eijmiv I am
hJmei`~ we (pronoun)
qeov~, oJ God; god
kajgwv and I (kai; ejgwvsee Chapter 1, 1.7)
kefalhv, hJ head
mevnw I am abiding, I am remaining
Pau`lo~, oJ Paul
Pevtro~, oJ Peter
presbuvtero~, -a, -on older, elder
suv you (sg., pronoun)
uJmei`~ you (pl., pronoun)
* dev is postpositive, which means that it never appears first in a sentence or

clause. Its usual position is second but it can appear third. However, it is al-
ways translated as if it were first.
7.2 Pronouns
A pronoun is a word that takes the place of a noun or other substantive
that has already been used or is obvious from context. The noun that the
pronoun replaces is called the antecedent. A pronoun must agree with its
antecedent in gender and number. The case of the pronoun is determined
by its own use in the sentence or clause. Like other substantives, pro-
nouns are declined according to case.
7.3 Personal Pronouns

A personal pronoun is a pronoun that replaces or stands for a noun that
refers to a person or thing. My name is Mike. I am your Greek teacher.
I is a personal pronoun and replaces the proper noun Mike. In this
case, Mike is the antecedent of the pronoun I. The use of personal
pronouns in Greek parallels their use in English. They are used to re-
place nouns so as to avoid monotony. I have the bread and I am eating
it sounds better than I have the bread and I am eating the bread. Note
that in this example the antecedent of the personal pronoun it is bread.
Bread is considered to be neuter in English and so is referred to as
it. In Greek, however, bread (a[rto~) is masculine and so the pro-
noun that replaces it must be masculine in gender: e[cw to;n a[rton kai;
ejsqivw aujtovn. When translating this sentence into English, however, we
use it rather than him because of English usage.
7.4 Declension of Personal Pronouns

Personal pronouns are three in number and are referred to as first, sec-
ond, and third personal pronouns. They are declined as follows:
First Person
Singular Plural
N ejgwv I hJmei`~ we
GA ejmou` or mou of/from me hJmw`n of/from us
DLI ejmoiv or moi to/in/by me hJmi`n to/in/by us
AC ejmev or me me hJma`~ us
Personal Pronouns 51
Second Person
Singular Plural
N suv you uJmei`~ you
GA sou` or sou of/from you uJmw`n of/from you
DLI soi` or soi to/in/by you uJmi`n to/in/by you
AC sev or se you uJma`~ you
The first and second personal pronouns are not distinguished by gen-
der. The unaccented forms of the first and second personal pronouns are
enclitics and are pronounced with the words that precede them. They
take an accent of their own only under certain circumstances. See the
appendix on accents for more information on enclitics.
Third Person
Masculine
Singular Plural
N aujtov~ he aujtoiv they
GA aujtou` of/from him aujtw`n of/from them
DLI aujtw/ to/in/by him aujtoi`~ to/in/by them
AC aujtovn him aujtouv~ them
Feminine
Singular Plural
N aujthv she aujtaiv they
GA aujth`~ of/from her aujtw`n of/from them
DLI aujth`/ to/in/by her aujtai`~ to/in/by them
AC aujthvn her aujtav~ them
Neuter
Singular Plural
N aujtov it aujtav they
GA aujtou` of/from it aujtw`n of/from them
DLI auhtw`/ to/in/by it aujtoi`~ to/in/by them
AC aujtov it aujtav them
Third personal pronouns decline like the adjective ajgaqov~, with the
exception of the neuter nominative and accusative singular, which fol-
low the pattern of a[llo~ and drop the n. All plural forms of the third
personal pronoun are translated they, them, etc., but Greek re-
quires all three genders so that the pronoun can agree with its antecedent
in gender. Note that personal pronouns have no vocative forms.
7.5 Use of Personal Pronouns

1. Omission of Personal Pronouns
Personal pronouns are normally not used in the nominative case because
the personal ending of the verb supplies the subject in Greek. Personal
pronouns are used in the nominative only to show contrast or emphasis.
By itself, luvei~ means, You are loosing, but su; luvei~ adds emphasis:
You are loosing. In English we indicate such emphasis by using italics
or by tone of voice. Contrast may be indicated as follows: ejgw; uiJo~v, su;
de; dou`lo~ (I am a son, but you are a bondservant).
2. Possession
Greek uses the unaccented forms of the genitive case of personal pro-
nouns to indicate possession. Note that in this usage the pronoun follows
the noun, unlike in English. For example, oJ lovgo~ mou literally means
the word of me, but is best translated as my word. This construc-
tion is also used with nouns: oJ uiJo;~ tou` ajnqrwvpou is translated the
mans son (see Chapter 3). Greek also uses the possessive pronoun or
adjective to express possession (see Chapter 24).
3. Pronouns Used With Prepositions

The emphatic or accented forms of personal pronouns are ordinarily
used after prepositions: ejn ejmoiv, ajpÆ ejmou`. Note that elision occurs in
this usage. An exception to this norm is prov~ me (rather than prov~
ejmev). This construction is found frequently in the New Testament.
4. Special Uses of aujtov~

aujtov~ is rarely used in the nominative case to indicate the subject. It is,
however, used in two distinct ways:
a. When it appears in the attributive position (with the article),

whether in the nominative or in any other case, aujtov~ is
translated same. Greek has no separate word for same,
as we do in English. The same word is rendered in Greek
as oJ aujto;~ lovgo~ or oJ lovgo~ oJ aujtov~. This is called the
adjectival use of aujtov~.
b. When it appears in the predicate position (without the ar-

ticle), aujtov~ intensifies the noun it modifies, and is trans-
lated self. (e.g., himself, themselves, itself, etc.).
This is called the intensive use of aujtov~. Both oJ lovgo~
aujtov~ and aujto;~ oJ lovgo~ are translated the word itself.
The intensive aujtov~ is also used with other pronouns or
with the unexpressed subject of a verb: aujto;~ su; levgei~ or
aujto;~ levgei~ (You yourself say); aujth; levgei (She her-
self says); aujtoi; levgomen (We ourselves say), etc.
7.6 Parsing Pronouns

Parse any pronoun as follows: type of pronoun, case, gender (if appli-
cable), person, and number. Also give the antecedent where appropri-
ate. Example: aujtoivpersonal pronoun, nominative, masculine, third,
plural.
7.7 The Verb eijmiv

Greek verbs are divided into two basic conjugations: the -w conjugation
and the -mi conjugation. The -w conjugation verbs follow the pattern of
luvw (see Chapter 2). eijmiv is the most common verb of the older but
much smaller -mi conjugation. Other -mi conjugation verbs will be in-
troduced later (see Chapter 26). Like the verb to be in English, eijmiv is
a very important verb in Greek.
7.8 Present Indicative Forms of eijmiv

Singular Plural
eijmiv I am ejsmevn we are
ei\ you are ejstev you are
ejstiv(n) he/she/it is eijsiv(n) they are
1) All the forms of eijmiv are enclitics except ei\.
2) Since eijmiv expresses state of being rather than action, it has

no voice. Parse forms of eijmiv as follows: ei\present, in-
dicative, second, singular, from eijmiv.
3) Note the moveable n in the third person singular and plural

forms.
4) Verbs that express a state of being do not take a direct ob-

ject. Rather, they often serve to link the subject noun to
another noun in the predicate that is identified with the sub-
ject or to an adjective in the predicate that describes the
subject noun (see Chapter 5 for a discussion of the predicate
adjective). For this reason, eijmiv, like the English verb to
be, is called a linking verb or a copula, from the Latin
word for link. This predicate noun is normally in the nomi-
native case and is called a complement or a predicate nomi-
native. It agrees in case with the subject because it com-
pletes the meaning of the subject by making a further
statement about it. Example: oJ a[nv qrwpo~ ejstin didavskalo~
(The man is a teacher.) Here, a[nqrwpo~ is the subject of
the sentence and didavskalo~ is the predicate nominative.
5) Note that Greek differs from English in that the verb eijmiv
(to be) may be omitted from a sentence if it is understood
from the context. In the sentence oJ a[nqrwpo~ didavskalo~,
the verb (ejstin) is understood. When the verb eijmiv, whether
stated or implied, links two nouns as subject and predicate,
one with the article and the other without the article, the
noun with the article is the subject because it is more defi-
nite. (See Chapter 27 for more details on this usage)
6) The English statement, There is . . . , has no direct coun-

terpart in Greek. This construction is used in English to in-
dicate that the subject of the sentence is to follow, as in,
There is a sin which leads to death (1 Jn 5:16). The Greek
in this verse reads, e[stin aJmartiva pro;~ qavnaton. So, al-
though Greek does not have this particular construction, there
will be cases in which sentences or verses will have to be
translated into English with this sense.

Mt. 16:28 Jn. 20:28
Lk. 4:41 1 Cor. 12:5-6
Jn. 6:35 I Jn. 1:5
Jn. 14:11
7.10 Exercises
1. ejgwv eijmi dou`lo~, su; de; ei\ profhvth~.
2. oJ uiJov~ mou lambavnei to;n movnon kalo;n a[rton.
3. oiJ a[ggeloi a[gousi tou;~ ajnqrwvpou~ eij~ to;n oi\kon.
4. ejste; profh`tai tou` kuvriou kai; a[ggeloi ajgavph~.
5. diÆ ejme; blevpete to;n kuvrion.
6. e[comen ejkklhsivan kai; mevnomen ejn aujth`/.
7. kajgw; didavskw tou;~ uiJou;~ mou peri; th`~ basileiva~.
8. aujto;~ lambavnw ta; dw`ra ajpo; tou` maqhtou`.
9. manqavnomen to;n aujto;n lovgon.
10. metÆ aujtw`n ejsmevn ejn tw`/ iJerw`/.
11. a[gei me pro;~ to;n ajpovstolon.
12. ei\ maqhth;~ tou` kuvriou;
13. ejsti;n hJ ajgavph tou` qeou` ejn hJmi`n.
14. oJ Pau`lo~ kai; oJ Pevtro~ ajpovstoloiv eijsin.
15. ejgwv eijmi oJ prw`to~ kai; oJ e[scato~.

Chapter 8
Demonstrative Pronouns,
Conjunctions, and Particles
8.1 Vocabulary
aJmartavnw I sin
aJmartwlov~, oJ sinner
ajmhvn verily, truly, amen (particle)
ajnoivgw I open
gavr for (conj.); causal, postpositive
ejkei`no~, -h, -o that (pron.)
ejpaggeliva, hJ promise
e[rgon, tov work
eujaggevlion, tov Gospel, Good News
jIhsou`~, oJ * Jesus
laov~, oJ people
o{ti because; that (conj.); may also mark the begin-
ning of a quotation. In this usage, the first word
of the quotation is capitalized.
ouj not (proclitic particleoujk before smooth breath-
ing, oujc before rough breathing)
ou|to~, au{th, tou`to this (pron.)
tevknon, tov child
carav, hJ joy
Cristov~, oJ Christ
* The noun Ij hsou`~ has only three forms: Ij hsou`~ (nom.), Ij hsou` (gen., abl.,
dat., loc, instr.), and Ij hsou`n (acc.).
8.2 Demonstrative Pronouns

There are two demonstrative pronouns in Greek. They are used to point
out or call attention to a designated person or object. The near demon-
strative ou|to~ (this) points out something near the speaker, while the
far demonstrative ejkei`no~ (that) points out something further away.
8.3 Forms of the Demonstrative Pronouns

1. ou|to~ is declined like first and second declension nouns except in
the neuter nominative and accusative singular. Each form, except the
masculine and feminine nominative singular and plural, begins with the
letter t. The first o changes to a wherever there is an a or h in the
ending. Be careful to distinguish the demonstrative pronouns au{th and
au|tai from the personal pronouns aujthv and aujtaiv.
ou|to~
Singular
N ou|to~ au{th tou`to
GA touvtou tauvth~ touvtou
DLI touvtw/ tauvth// touvtw/
AC tou`ton tauvthn tou`to
Plural
N ou|toi au|tai tau`ta
GA touvtwn touvtwn touvtwn
DLI touvtoi~ tauvtai~ touvtoi~
AC touvtou~ tauvta~ tau`ta
2. The declension of ejkei`no~ is more regular. It is declined like the

adjective a[llo~ (see Chapter 5) and the personal pronoun aujtov (see
Chapter 7).
Demonstrative Pronouns, Conjunctions, and Particles 59
ejkei`no~
Singular
N ejkei`no~ ejkeivnh ejkei`no
GA ejkeivnou ejkeivnh~ ejkeivnou
DLI ejkeivnw/ ejkeivnh/ ejkeivnw/
AC ejkei`non ejkeivnhn ejkei`no
Plural
N ejkei`noi ejkei`nai ejkei`na
GA ejkeivnwn ejkeivnwn ejkeivnwn
DLI ejkeivnoi~ ejkeivnai~ ejkeivnoi~
AC ejkeivnou~ ejkeivna~ ejkei`na
Note that the demonstratives have no vocative case.
8.4 Uses of Demonstratives

1. Demonstratives can function either as adjectives or as pronouns.
Most often they are used to modify nouns and they must agree with the
nouns they modify in case, gender, and number, just as adjectives agree
with the nouns they modify. In this usage the demonstrative is always in
the predicate position, rather than in the attributive position as might be
expected. Examples: ou|to~ oJ lovgo~ (this word) and ejn ejkei`nh/ th`/
ejkklhsiva/ (in that church).
2. Demonstratives are also used substantivally. In this usage the

pronoun stands alone, without a noun to modify, and is never preceded
by the article. Examples: ou|to~ levgei lovgon (This man is speaking a
word); ejkeivnh blevpei ton; oi\kon (That woman sees the house); and
ginwvskw tau`ta (I know these things). Be careful not to confuse the
substantival use of the demonstrative pronoun with the adjectival use.
For example, ou|tov~ ejstin maqhth;~ kai; ajpovstolo~ is translated This
man is a disciple and an apostle, whereas ou|to~ oJ maqhth;~ kaiv ejstin

ajpovstolo~ is translated This disciple is also an apostle.
8.5 Plural Neuter Subject

An exception to the rule of subject/verb agreement that was introduced
earlier in the course is that neuter plural nouns often take a singular
verb. This is probably because the neuter plural was thought to express
a collective concept. For example, a collective noun, like children,
refers to an entire group of persons or things. This usage seems strange
to English speakers, so do not be confused when you encounter it in the
exercises and in the Greek text.
8.6 Conjunctions
A conjunction joins together words, phrases, and clauses. Conjunctions
are classed as coordinate or subordinate, based on usage. Coordinate
conjunctions connect two or more words, phrases, and clauses (and, but,
therefore, or, nor). Subordinate conjunctions introduce dependent clauses
(if, although, when, because, that). Greek conjunctions learned so far
are: coordinate, as in dev, kaiv, gavr; or subordinate, as in o{ti.
8.7 Particles
The word particle comes from the Latin word meaning small part.
Particles are small words that do not fit into any other grammatical cat-
egory. Particles are often used to mark emphasis and transition. They
are also used to express the negative in Greek. Particles learned so far
are ajmhvn and ouj. Some grammarians consider dev to be a particle, espe-
cially when it is used to show transition, but we have classed it as a
conjunction. The negative particle ouj is normally placed immediately in
front of the word it negates: oJ profhvth~ ouj didavskei ejn tw`/ iJerw`/
(The prophet is not teaching in the temple).
Demonstrative Pronouns, Conjunctions, and Particles 61
8.8 o{ti vs. gavr

The conjunctions o{ti and gavr are both causal, that is, they express the
cause of an action or state of being. These conjunctions are similar in
meaning, but not in function. o{ti is a subordinate conjunction that intro-
duces subordinate clauses that cannot stand alone, as in 1 Jn. 2:12 (I am
writing to you, little children, because your sins are forgiven you . . .).
gavr is a coordinate conjunction that introduces independent clauses that
can stand alone, as in Jn. 3:16 (For God so loved the world . . .). In
this usage, gavr introduces a clause that gives the cause of the preceding
sentence or verse. See Phil. 2:12-13 in the Verses for Application sec-
tion below. You must look at verse 12 to see the causal function of gavr
in verse 13.

Mt. 3:17 Rom. 1:17
Mt. 9:3 Phil. 2:12-13
Jn. 10:1 Rev. 22:6
8.10 Exercises
1. ou|to~ oJ profhvth~ ginwvskei to;n maqhthvn.
2. au|tai oujk e[cousin eijrhvnhn.
3. ou|tov~ ejstin oJ lovgo~ tou` kuvriou, ejkei`no~ dev ejstin oJ lovgo~

aJmartwlw`n.
4. ou|toi ponhroi; aJmartwloiv, oJ de; Ij hsou`~ a[gei aujtou;~ ejk tw`n

aJmartiw`n aujtw`n eij~ th;n basileivan aujtou`.
5. ginwvskomen th;n ajlhvqeian kai; ajkouvomen aujth;n ajpo; toutw`n tw`n

ajggevlwn tou` kuvriou.
6. ou|to~ oJ aujto;~ Cristov~ ejstin oJ Messiva~ tou` laou`.
7. oJ didavskalo~ aujto;~ levgei lovgou~ th`~ cara;~ toi`~ o[cloi~.
8. oiJ ajpovstoloi lambavnousi to;n a[rton ejn tw`/ iJerw`/.
9. ejkei`no~ ginwvskei th;n eijrhvnhn, ou|to~ de; ginwvskei aJmartivan

o{ti oujk ajkouvei th;n ejpaggelivan tou` kuvriou.
10. oJ Cristov~ ejstin oJ kuvrio~ hJmw`n kai; fevrei th;n ajgavphn hJmi`n.
11. oujc ou|tov~ ejstin oJ Messiva~;
12. didavskousin oiJ ajpovstoloi ejn th`/ ejkklhsiva/.
13. ajgaqo;~ ga;r oJ profhvth~ kai; ajnoivgei ta;~ grafa;~ tw`/ o[clw/.
14. ta; tevkna ajkouvei ton; lovgon tou` kuvriou.
15. ginwvskomen th;n eijrhvnhn o{ti e[comen th;n ajgavphn tou` Cristou`
ejn uJmi`n.
Chapter 9
Present Passive and Middle

Indicative
9.1 Vocabulary
ai[rw I take up, I take away
ajnaginwvskw I read
bavllw I throw
baptivzw I immerse, I put into
doxavzw I glorify
e[rhmo~, hJ * desert, wilderness
zwhv, hJ life
kardiva, hJ heart
khruvssw I proclaim, I herald
kovsmo~, oJ world
krivnw I judge
oujranov~, oJ heaven (often used in pl. in the New Testament)
sunavgw I gather together
sw/vzw I save, I deliver
tovpo~, oJ place
fwnhv, hJ voice, sound
9.2 Passive Voice

Passive voice usage is the same in Greek as in English. It indicates that
the subject of the verb is receiving the action, rather than performing it.
* Note that e[rhmo~ is a second declension feminine noun.

In other words, the subject is being acted upon by an outside agent. For
example: I am loosing the evil man (active voice) and The evil man
is being loosed by me (passive voice). Note that when this sentence is
changed from active to passive the direct object in the active sentence
becomes the subject in the passive sentence. The subject in the active
sentence becomes the agent who performs the action in the passive sen-
tence. The concept of agency is discussed in section 9.4 below. In En-
glish, the passive voice is expressed by combining a verbs past parti-
ciple with the appropriate tense of the verb to be (is loosed; was
loosed). Sometimes an auxiliary (helping) verb is added to the con-
struction (is being loosed). Greek uses a single passive voice form of
the verb to express all these possibilities, as in luvomaiI am (being)
loosed.
9.3 Forms of the Present Passive Indicative

The present passive indicative is formed by using the following formula:
present stem + connecting vowel (o or e) + primary passive personal
ending: lu + o + mai = luvomai.
Present Passive Indicative of luvw

Singular Plural
luvomai I am being loosed luovmeqa we are being loosed
luvh/ you are being loosed luvesqe you are being loosed
luvetai he/she/it is being loosed luvontai they are being loosed
The primary passive personal endings are actually -mai -sai -tai -
meqa -sqe and -ntai. These endings are joined to the stem by a connect-
ing vowel: o before endings that begin with m or n and e before endings
that begin with any other letter. The second person singular ending h/
results from contraction, which is discussed later (see Chapter 17).
9.4 Agency
Very often the agentthe person or thing producing the actionof a
passive voice verb is identified. There are three distinct ways to express
agency in Greek:
Present Passive and Middle Indicative 65
1. Direct Agency
The agent who directly performs the action on the subject is called the
direct agent. Direct agency is expressed by the preposition uJpov followed
by the ablative case (uJpov followed by the genitive in the five-case sys-
tem): sw/zovmeqa uJpo; tou` qeou` (We are being saved by God). God is
the direct agent by whom we are saved.
2. Intermediate Agency
The agent who acts upon the subject on someone elses behalf is called
the intermediate agent. Intermediate agency is expressed by the preposi-
tion diav followed by the ablative case (diav followed by the genitive in
the five-case system): sw/zovmeqa dia; tou` maqhtou` (We are being saved
through the disciple). The idea is that we are being saved by God (the
direct agent) through the teaching of the disciple (the intermediate agent).
To distinguish clearly between direct agency and intermediate agency in
translation, it is recommended that you render uJpov as by and diav as
through.
3. Impersonal Agency
When the agent producing the action is impersonal, agency is expressed
by the instrumental case, with or without the preposition ejn (ejn followed
by the dative in the five-case system): sw/zovmeqa (ejn) tw/ lovgw/ tou`
qeou` (We are being saved by the Word of God). The sense is that
God does the saving by means of His Word.
4. Unexpressed Agent
The passive voice also occurs without an expressed agent, as in the ex-
ample: oiJ nekroi; ejgeivrontai (The dead ones are being raised up).
This is an example of the divine passive. This particular use of the
passive voice avoids naming God directly as the agent, although it is
understood from the context. (See the Beatitudes in Mt. 5.)
9.5 Middle Voice

Greek has a third voice, called middle, which has no direct counterpart
in English. It shows the subject as acting upon itself, with reference to
itself, or in its own interests. See section 9.7 below for uses of the
middle voice.
9.6 Forms of the Present Middle Indicative

Present middle indicative forms are identical to those of the present pas-
sive indicative. Context determines whether a form is passive or middle.
Present Middle Indicative of luvw

Singular
luvomai I am loosing (for) myself
luvh/ you are loosing (for) yourself
luvetai he/she/it is loosing (for)
himself/herself/itself
Plural
luovmeqa we are loosing (for) ourselves
luvesqe you are loosing (for) yourselves
luvontai they are loosing (for) themselves
9.7 Uses of the Middle Voice

1. Reflexive Middle
In this usage the subject is both the agent and the receiver of the action:
oJJ a[nqrwpo~ ejgeivretai (The man is raising himself up). The reflex-
ive middle, also called the direct middle, is not widely used in the New
Testament. The reflexive idea is more commonly expressed by an active
voice verb accompanied by a reflexive pronoun (see Chapter 24).
2. Intensive Middle
This usage emphasizes the subjects performance of the action rather
than the subjects participation in the results of the action, as in: oJ kuvrio~
didavsketai tou;~ maqhtav~ (The Lord is teaching the disciples). The
idea is that the Lord, and no one else, is doing the teaching. The word
self is used by some grammarians to emphasize the subjects partici-
pation in the action, as if the intensive pronoun aujtov~ had been used:
The Lord himself is teaching the disciples.
Present Passive and Middle Indicative 67
3. Indirect Middle
This use of the middle voice presents the subject as acting in its own
interest, as in: lambavnontai to;n a[rton (They are taking the bread for
themselves). It is sometimes difficult to distinguish between the inten-
sive middle and the indirect middle.
4. Reciprocal Middle
This usage of the middle represents an interchange of action among a
plural subject, as in: oJ maqhtai; didavskontai (The disciples are teach-
ing one another).
It should be noted that some Greek verbs have a meaning in the

middle voice that is entirely different from its meaning in the active
voice. Example: ajpovllumi (activeI destroy); ajpovllumai (middle
I perish). See Chapter 26.
9.8 Choosing Between Passive and Middle Voice

Context ultimately determines whether a form is passive or middle, but
here are two rules of thumb for choosing between them:
1. If agency is expressed or implied, the verb is passive. Ex-

ample: oiJ aJmartwloi; sw/vzontai (uJpo; tou` kuvriou)The
sinners are being saved (by the Lord).
2. If the verb takes a direct object it is most likely middle. Very

few Greek passive verbs take a direct object and this is best
learned by observation. Example: oiJ uiJoi; lambavnontai to;n
karpovnThe sons are taking the fruit (for themselves).

Jn. 1:3 Eph. 2:8
Acts 25:11 Heb. 3:4
Rom. 1:18
9.10 Exercises
1. aiJ ejkklhsivai luvontai uJpo; tw`n ponhrw`n ajnqrwvpwn.
2. oiJ maqhtai; didavskontai ejn tw`/ iJerw`/;
3. oJ qeo;~ doxavzetai ejn toi`~ lovgoi~ tw`n pistw`n.
4. oiJ aJmartwloi; swv/zontai ejk tou` kovsmou.
5. oJ ajpovstolo~ khruvssetai to;n lovgon tou` kuvriou.
6. oiJ uiJoi; lambavnontai to;n karpovn.
7. oJ kako;~ a[vnqrwpo~ doxavzetai o{ti ouj ginwvskei th;n oJdo;n tou`

kuvriou.
8. oJ ajpovstoloi ajpostevllontai eij~ to;n kovsmon.
9. oiJ dou`loi swv/zontai dia; tou` maqhtou` tou` kuvriou.
10. ejn th`/ kardiva/ tou` ponhrou` uiJou` mevnei hJ aJmartiva.
11. oJ jIhsou`~ didavsketai ta;~ pista;~ ejn th`/ ejkklhsiva/.
12. ta; tevkna a[getai eij~ th;n e[rhmon ejn toi`~ lovgoi~ tou` ponhrou`.
13. para; th`/ ejrhvmw/ to; eujaggevlion khruvssetai uJpo; tou` profhvtou.
14. ajnaginwvskontai aiJ grafai; tw`/ o[clw/.
15. oiJ a[nqrwpoi mevnousi su;n toi`~ uiJoi`~.

Chapter 10
Deponent Verbs
10.1 Vocabulary
ajllav but (stronger than dev)
ajpokrivnomai I answer (takes object in dative case)
a[rcw I rule (takes object in genitive case)
ajspavzomai I greet
givnomai * I become (linking verb; takes a predicate
nominative rather than a direct object)
me;n . . . dev on the one hand . . . on the other hand (particle,
postpositive)
oujdev and not, nor, not even (conj.)
oujde; . . . oujdev neither . . . nor
oujkevti no longer (adv.)
ou[pw not yet (adv.)
poreuvomai I come, I go, I proceed
e[rcomai I come, I go
ajpevrcomai I come/go away, I depart
dievrcomai I come/go through
eijsevrcomai I come/go into, I enter
ejxevrcomai I come/go out of
katevrcomai I come/go down
prosevrcomai I come/go to, I come/go towards
sunevrcomai I come/go together with
* The basic meaning of the verb givnomai is to become but it also can mean
to happen or to come to pass. It occurs with this meaning often in the
Gospel narratives. See Mk. 2:23 in the verses for application.
10.2 Deponent Verbs

A deponent verb is a verb whose voice form does not correspond to its
meaning. The word deponent comes from the Latin verb meaning to
lay aside. At some point in the development of the Greek language,
these verbs laid aside their active forms in favor of middle or passive
forms. Deponent verbs usually have a middle form with an active mean-
ing, but sometimes a passive form has an active meaning. Deponent
verbs never have a passive meaning. An example of a deponent verb is
ajpokrivnomai, which is middle in form but active in meaning (I an-
swer). A verb may be deponent in one tense but not deponent in one or
more other tenses. You can determine if a verb is deponent by looking at
the lexical form. If the lexical form ends in -omai the verb is deponent
(e[rcomaiI go). To determine if a verb is deponent in one tense but
not in another, you must examine the principal parts of the verb. Greek
verbs have six principal parts, but only the first principal partthe present
active indicativehas been introduced so far. Some verbs do not have
all six principal parts.
When parsing a deponent verb, say deponent, rather than middle
or passive. While most deponent verbs are middle in form, some are
passive and it is simpler to say deponent at this stage of study than to
attempt to distinguish between middle and passive forms. For example,
parse e[rcetai as present, deponent, indicative, third, singular from
e[rcomai.
10.3 Direct Objects in Cases Other than the

Accusative
Some verbs take a direct object in a case other than the accusative. For
example, ajpokrivnomai takes its direct object in the dative case:
ajpokrivnomai tw`/ didavskalw/I am answering the teacher. a[rcw takes
its direct object in the genitive case: a[rcei tou` laou`He is ruling the
people. A special case is ajkouvw, which can takes its direct object in
either the accusative or the genitive case: ajkouvei~ to;n profhvthn OR
ajkouvei~ tou` profhvtouYou are hearing the prophet.
Deponent Verbs 71
10.4 Uses of kaiv

So far kaiv has been seen only in its basic function as a simple connective
(and), but this conjunction has other uses as well. Originally an ad-
verb, kaiv is often used adverbially to add emphasis to the word that
follows it. In this usage kaiv may be translated as also or even. Both
context and location must be considered when translating kaiv. Examples:
kai; oiJ aJmartwloi; ginwvskousi tou`toEven sinners know this. tou`to
kai; levgomenThis we also say. The conjunction kaiv can also be
used as a correlative (used in pairs). In this usage kai; . . . kaiv is trans-
lated both . . . and: kai; oiJ a[nqrwpoi kai; oiJ uiJoi; levgousi tau`ta
Both the men and the sons are saying these things.
10.5 Uses of oujdev

The conjunction oujdev, like kaiv, can have more than one use. Often it is
a simple connective and is translated and not or nor: ouj ginwvskomen
tou`to oujde; ginwvskousi tou`tovWe do not know this, nor do they
know it. Like kaiv, oujdev can be used to add emphasis, and in this usage
it is best translated not even: oujde; oiJ ajpovstoloi ginwvskousi tou`to
Not even the apostles know this. oujdev can also have a correlative use,
in the meaning neither . . . nor: oujde; oiJ ajpovstoloi oujde; oiJ maqhtai;
ginwvskousi tou`toNeither the apostles nor the disciples know this.
10.6 me;n . . . dev

The postpositive particle mevn and the conjunction dev are often used to-
gether to show contrast. The construction me;n . . . dev means on the one
hand . . . on the other hand. Since this translation is rather clumsy, it is
better not to translate mevn and to translate dev as but. Example: ejkei`no~
me;n mevnei ejn tw`/ kovsmw`/, ou|to~ de; eijsevrcetai eij~ th;n basileivan
tou` qeou`(On the one hand) that man is remaining in the world, but
(on the other hand) this man is entering into the kingdom of God.

Mt. 10:24 Jn. 14:6
Mk. 2:23 1 Cor. 1:16
Jn. 13:38 1 Jn. 4:14
Deponent Verbs 73
10.8 Exercises
1. givnesqe oiJ uiJoi; tou` qeou` dia; to;n lovgon aujtou`.
2. oJ kuvrio~ ajpokrivnetai toi`~ maqhtai`~.
3. ejkei`noi eijsevrcontai eij~ to;n oi\kon, ou{toi de; ejxevrcontai ejk

tou` oi[kou.
4. blevpomen kai; th;n ejxousivan kai; th;n dovxan tou` kuvriou.
5. didaskovmeqa me;n uJpo; tou` jIhsou`, didavskesqe de; uJpo; tou` ponhrou`
maqhtou`.
6. oiJ pistoi; poreuvontai eij~ th;n ejkklhsivan.
7. oJ kuvrio~ ajpokrivnetai tw`/ o[clw/ ejn toi`~ lovgoi~ parabolh`~.
8. oJ dou`lo~ ou[pw katevrcetai eij~ to; iJerovn.
9. oujde; oiJ ajpovstoloi oujde; oiJ profh`tai levgousin tau`ta.
10. oJ aJmartwlo;~ ginwvskei th;n oJdo;n tou` kuvriou, ajllÆ oujk eijsevrcetai
eij~ th;n basileivan aujtou`.
11. ejxercovmeqa ejk tw`n tovpwn aJmartiva~ o{ti ajkouvomen th`~ fwnh`~
tou` kuvriou.
12. oiJ ajgaqoi; a[nqrwpoi sunevrcontai ejn tw`/ oi[kw/ tou` qeou`.
13. oujde; oiJ a[ggeloi ginwvskousi tau`ta.
14. para; potamou` poreuvetai ta; tevkna.
15. dia; th`~ ejrhvmou dievrcetai oJ profhvth~.

(page 74 blank)
Chapter 11
Imperfect Active and Middle/Passive

Indicative
11.1 Vocabulary
ajpoqnh/vskw I die
ajpokteivnw I kill
bivblion, tov book
daimovnion, tov devil
devcomai I receive, I welcome
eJorthv, hJ feast
e[ti still, yet (adv.)
eJtoimavzw I prepare
qavlassa, hJ sea
qerapeuvw I heal
kaqarivzw I cleanse, I purify
nu`n now (adv.)
ou[n therefore, then, accordingly (adv.); postpositive
ou{tw~ thus, so, in this manner (adv.)
pisteuvw I believe, I have faith (used with dative direct object
or with eij~ followed by the accusative)
ploivon, tov boat
pravssw I do, I perform, I practice
skotiva, hJ darkness
staurov~, oJ cross
tovte then (adv.)
11.2 The Imperfect Tense

Greek verbs have three secondary tenses, which express action occuring
in past time: imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect. The aorist and pluperfect
tenses will be introduced later. The imperfect tense expresses continu-
ous or progressive action in the past and it is found only in the indicative
mood.
11.3 Imperfect Active Indicative Forms

The imperfect tense is built on the stem of the present tense and so is not
one of the six principal parts of the Greek verb. An indicator of a past
tense in Greek is the presence of an augment, which may be syllabic or
temporal. Verbs beginning with a consonant have an e prefixed to the
stem. This is called a syllabic augment because it adds a syllable to the
verb. An example is the imperfect active indicative of luvw, which is
e[luon (see the forms for the imperfect active indicative for luvw, below).
Verbs beginning with a vowel lengthen that vowel, forming what is called
a temporal augment. In this process o lengthens to w, and both a and e
lengthen to h. For example, the imperfect active indicative of ajkouvw is
hjkouvon. Initial diphthongs ordinarily lengthen as follows: aih//; eih/;
oiw//; auhu; and euhu (or remains the same). The vowels i and u
change from short to long but there is no difference in the way they are
written.
A rough breathing mark appearing on the initial vowel or diphthong
is retained in the augment. In compound verbs the augment appears after
the preposition and before the verb stem. For example, ejkbavllw be-
comes ejxevballon. The formula for forming the imperfect tense is aug-
ment + present stem + personal endings.
Imperfect Active Indicative of luvw

Singular Plural
e[luon I was loosing ejluvomen we were loosing
e[lue~ you were loosing ejluvete you were loosing
e[lue(n) he/she/it was loosing e[luon they were loosing
Imperfect Active and Middle/Passive Indicative 77
1) The initial vowel in the above-listed endings is a connecting

vowel - o before m or n and e before any other ending. The
actual secondary active indicative endings are:
Singular Plural
n men
~ te
- n
Familiarity with these endings will help you learn ending patterns for the
other Greek tenses that denote action in past time.
2) Note that the first person singular and the third person plural
endings are identical and must be distinguished by context.
3) The secondary third person singular has no ending. Note

that it often takes a moveable n.
4) The imperfect of e[cw is irregular: ei\con, ei\ce~, ei\ce,

ei\comen, ei\cete, ei\con.
11.4 Imperfect Middle/Passive Forms

Middle/passive forms of the imperfect tense are identical, just as they
are in the present tense. Context determines whether the middle or the
passive voice is in view.
Imperfect Middle Indicative of luvw

Singular
ejluovmhn I was loosing (for) myself
ejluvou you were loosing (for) yourself
ejluveto he/she/it was loosing (for) himself/herself/itself
Plural
ejluovmeqa we were loosing (for) ourselves
ejluvesqe you were loosing (for) yourselves
ejluvonto they were loosing (for) themselves
Imperfect Passive Indicative of luvw

Singular
ejluovmhn I was being loosed
ejluvou you were being loosed
ejluveto he/she/it was being loosed
Plural
ejluovmeqa we were being loosed
ejluvesqe you were being loosed
ejluvonto they were being loosed
1) As with the imperfect active forms, the initial vowel in the

middle/passive endings is a connecting vowel. The actual
secondary middle/passive indicative endings are:
Singular Plural
mhn meqa
so sqe
to nto
2) In the second person singular, s drops out and the connecting

vowel e contracts with the ending o, so that ejluveso becomes
ejluvou. For the principles of contraction, see Chapter 17.
3) Remember that a verb that is deponent in the present tense

will also be deponent in the imperfect. Example: e[rcomai
(present), h[rcomhn (imperfect).
11.5 Imperfect Indicative of eijmiv

As noted in Chapter 7, eijmiv is a state of being verb and so has no voice.
Its imperfect tense forms are as follows:
Singular Plural
h[mhn I was h\men (1) we were
h\~ you were h\te you were
h\n he/she/it was h\san they were
Imperfect Active and Middle/Passive Indicative 79
1) The form h\meqa sometimes is found in the New Testament

in place of h\men.
11.6 Uses of the Imperfect Tense

There are five main uses of the imperfect tense in Greek:
1) The most characteristic use of the imperfect tense is called

the progressive or descriptive imperfect. It describes the ac-
tion as in progress in past time: He was listening to the
teacher.
2) The imperfect can also describe action that occurred regu-

larly or ordinarily in past time. This is called the customary
imperfect: He used to listen to the teacher.
3) The repeated or iterative imperfect shows repeated action in

past time: He kept on listening to the teacher.
4) The tendential imperfect indicates that an action was at-

tempted, but not actually performed: He was trying to lis-
ten to the teacher.
5) A fifth use of the imperfect describes an action as continuing

in past time, but focuses on the beginning of the action: He
began listening to the teacher.
ALL of the above examples are expressed by one imperfect tense con-
struction in Greek: h[koue to;n didavskalon. Context must be your guide
in deciding which use of the imperfect will be reflected in your transla-
tion. Always begin with the progressive or descriptive imperfect and
work from there to find the best translation of the imperfect in a sentence
or verse.

Mt. 3:14 Lk. 2:41
Mt. 5:2 Lk. 23:34
Mk. 9:31 Gal. 1:13
11.8 Exercises
1. oJ qeo;~ ejdoxavzeto ejn tw`/ iJerw`/.
2. oJ jIhsou`~ h\n ejn tw`/ oi[kw/, ajllÆ oujk e[blepon aujtovn.
3. oi{ ajpovstoloi ejkhvrusson to; eujaggevlion toi`~ ajnqrwvpoi~.
4. tovte ejdidaskovmeqa uJpo; tou` kuvriou, nu`n de; didavskomen th;n

ejkklhsivan.
5. oJ Messiva~ ejkaqavrizen tou`~ ponhrou;~ ajnqrwvpou~ ajpo; tw`n

aJmartiw`n aujtw`n.
6. oJ dou`lo~ kathvrceto ajpo; tou` oi[kou pro;~ th;n qavlassan;
7. ta; daimovnia ejxebavllonto ejk tw`n aJmartwlw`n uJpo; tou` Messivou.
8. dia; th;n ajlhvqeian tou` qeou` ejswzovmeqa.
9. oiJ profh`tai oujk hjkouvon to;n kuvrion, ajllÆ ejdidavskonto.
10. oujde; oiJ ajgaqoi; a[vnqrwpoi ejswvzonto ejn toi`~ ajgaqoi`~ e[rgoi~.
11. oujk eijshrcovmeqa eij~ th;n basileivan tou` qeou` o{ti h\men e[ti ejn
th;/ skotiva/ tw`n aJmartiw`n hJmw`n.
12. oiJ ponhroi; douvloi ajpokteivnousi tou;~ maqhtav~.
13. to;n ajpovstolon ejdevconto oiJ pistoi; ejn th`/ eJorthv/.
14. th;n eijrhvnhn ouvk ei\cete o{ti ouj ejpisteuvete eij~ to;n uiJo;n tou`
qeou`.
15. oJ telwvnh~ th;n ajlhvqeian tw`n grafw`n ejmavnqane.

Chapter 12
Future Active and Middle Indicative

12.1 Vocabulary
a[gw I lead a[xw I will lead
ajkouvw I hear ajkouvsw I will hear
aJmartavnw I sin aJmarthvsw I will sin
baptivzw I immerse baptivsw I will immerse
blevpw I see blevyw I will see
givnomai I become genhvsomai I will become
ginwvskw I know gnwvsomai I will know
didavskw I teach didavxw I will teach
doxavzw I glorify doxavsw I will glorify
eijmiv I am e[somai I will be
e[rcomai I come, go ejleuvsomai I will come, go
ejsqivw I eat favgomai I will eat
euJrivskw I find euJrhvsw I will find
e[cw I have e{xw (1) I will have
katabaivnw I go down katabhvsomai I will go down
lambavnw I take, receive lhvmyomai I will take, receive
peivqw I persuade peivsw I will persuade
proseuvcomai I pray proseuvxomai I will pray
swv/zw I save swvsw I will save
fevrw I bear, bring oi[sw I will bear, bring
(1) Note that e{xw has rough breathing.

12.2 Forms of the Future Active and Middle

Indicative
As a primary tense, the future takes the same endings as the present
tense. In English, the sign or indicator of the future tense is shall (first
person singular and plural) or will (second and third person singular
and plural). In Greek, the sign of the future tense is ordinarily a s added
to the verb stem, which produces the future stem. To this stem are added
the appropriate connecting vowel and the primary personal endings.
1) This process is fairly straightforward for those verbs whose

verb stems and present stems are the same, and the stem
ends in a vowel. The future active indicative of luvw is ex-
actly the same as the present active indicative except for the
addition of a s to the stem. In the same way, the future
middle indicative of luvw is exactly the same as the present
middle indicative except for the addition of s (see the forms
for luvw below). The future passive, however, is built on a
different stem and is presented later (see Chapter 14).
2) When the stem of a verb ends in a consonant, certain changes

occur when s is added to the stem. This process, called amal-
gamation, occurs as follows:
a) s added to p, b, or f (labial consonants) forms the double

consonant y. Example: the future active indicative of
blevpw is blevyw.
b) s added to k, g, or c (palatal consonants) forms the
double consonant x. Example: the future active indica-
tive of a[gw is a[xw.
c) t, d, or q (dental consonants) drop out before s. Ex-
ample: the future active indicative of peivqw is peivsw.
d) Verb stems ending in a s, x, z, or y (sibilant conso-
nants) drop that sibilant before s. Example: the future
active indicative of swv/zw is swvsw.
e) Verb stems ending in l, m, n, or r (liquid consonants)
form the future tense differently. This is due to the prin-
ciples of contraction (see Chapter 17).
Future Active and Middle Indicative 83
3) Many Greek verbs have two stems: the present stem, which
is used to form the present and imperfect tenses, and the
verb stem itself, which is used to form the other tenses.
Keep in mind that the verb stem is the original stem and the
present stem represents a lengthening of that original stem.
If the verb stem differs from the present stem, the future
stem is formed by adding s to the verb stem rather than to
the present stem. For example, the verb stem of ginwvskw is
not ginwsk- but gnw-, which produces the future stem -gnws.
The verb stem of khruvssw is not khruss- but khruk-, which
produces the future stem khrux- according to the rules given
above.
4) Some verbs that are not deponent in the present tense be-
come deponent in the future, and possibly other tenses. Ex-
amples from the vocabulary study are: ginwvskw (present),
gnwvsomai (future); katabaivnw (present), katabhvsomai (fu-
ture); lambav n w (present), lhv m yomai (future); ej s qiv w
(present), favgomai (future).
5) There are some Greek verbs that form the future tense ir-
regularly. Examples are: aJmartavnw (present), aJmarthvsw
(future); euJrivskw (present), euJrhvsw (future); and fevrw,
(present), oi[sw (future). Also, the future of levgw is ejrw`,
which is conjugated according to the pattern of the liquid
stem verbs noted in (e) above.
Future Active Indicative of luvw

Singular Plural
luvsw I will loose luvsomen we will loose
luvsei~ you will loose luvsete you will loose
luvsei he, she, it will loose luvsousi(n) they will loose
Future Middle Indicative of luvw

Singular Plural
luvsomai I will loose myself, lusovmeqa we will loose ourselves,
I will loose for myself we will loose for
ourselves
luvsh/ you will loose yourself, luvsesqe you will loose
you will loose for yourselves,
yourself you will loose for
yourselves
luvsetai he will loose himself, luvsontai they will loose
he will loose for themselves,
himself they will loose for
themselves
Remember that the future passive is built on an entirely different stem

than the future middle. Do not confuse the future middle with the future
passive when translating.
12.3 Uses of the Future Tense

The future tense in Greek is used almost exclusively in the indicative
mood and it is always related to time. The time of action in this tense is
obviously future. The kind of action may be either summary or progres-
sive, but it is usually summary in nature. As always, context ultimately
determines the kind of action in view. The main uses of the future tense
are as follows:
1) The predictive future indicates what will take place or come

to pass. Example: He will teach you all things. (Jn. 14:26)
2) The imperatival future is used to express a command. Ex-

ample: You shall love the Lord your God. (Mt. 22:37)
3) The deliberative future is used to ask a question which im-

plies some doubt about the answer. Example: What shall
we say then? (Rom. 6:1)
Future Active and Middle Indicative 85
See the Verses for Application section below for more examples of these
usages in the New Testament. Other uses of the future tense are part of
intermediate and advanced language study.
12.4 Future Indicative of eijmiv

Singular Plural
e[somai I will be ejsovmeqa we will be
e[sh/ you will be e[sesqe you will be
e[stai he, she, it will be e[sontai they will be
1) Middle forms are used in the future tense of eijmiv.
2) The third person singular has no connecting vowel.
12.5 Principal Parts of Greek Verbs

The future active indicative is the second of the six principal parts of a
Greek verb. Both the future active and the future middle indicative are
represented by this principal part. The future passive is built on the sixth
principal part (see Chapter 14).

Mt. 1:21 Jn. 6:68
Jn. 5:25 2 Cor. 13:11
12.7 Exercises
1. oJ Messiva~ a[xei tou;~ pistou;~ eij~ th;n oJdo;n th`~ ajgavph~.
2. ejn ejkeivnh/ th`/ hJmevra/ ejleuvsetai oJ Cristo;~ su;n toi`~ ajggevloi~

aujtou`.
3. genhvsesqe oiJ uiJoi; tou` qeou`.
4. ejxeleuvsontai ejk tou` oi[kou aJmartiva~ eij~ th;n ejkklhsivan tou`

kuvriou.
5. oJ kuvrio~ eJtoimavsei th;n oJdo;n hJmi`n kai; a[xei hJma`~ eij~ aujthvn.
6. nu`n blevpomen aujto;n ajllÆ ejn ejkeivnh/ th`/ hJmevra/ kai; blevyomen kai;
gnwsovmeqa aujtovn.
7. ta; dw`ra ejlambavnonto uJpo; tw`n ponhrw`n uiJw`n.
8. ou[keti e[sontai oiJ a[nqrwpoi ejn th`/ skotiva/ ajllÆ e[sontai ejn th`/
basileiva/ tou` qeou`.
9. ejn tw`/ oujranw`/ e{xomen th;n zwh;n su;n tw`/ uiJw`/ tou` qeou`.
10. aujto;~ swvsei to;n lao;n aujtou` ajpo; tw`n aJmartiw`n aujtw`n.
11. eijsevrcontai eij~ th;n aujth;n ejkklhsivan.
12. oiJ ponhroi; dou`loi ouj swvsontai.
13. th;n ajlhvqeian euJrhvsousin o{ti manqavnousi ta;~ grafav~.
14. ta; tevkna to;n kalo;n karpo;n favgontai.
15. th;n zwh;n e{xei~ o{ti pisteuvei~ eij~ to;n Cristovn.

Chapter 13
Aorist Active and Middle Indicative

13.1 Vocabulary
a[gw I lead h[gagon I led
ajkouvw I hear h[kousa I heard
aJmartavnw I sin hJmavrthsa
h{marton I sinned
ajnabaivnw I go up ajnevbhn I went up
ajpoqnhv/skw I die ajpevqanon I died
ajpostevllw I send ajpevsteila I sent
bavllw I throw e[balon I threw
baptivzw I immerse e[baptisa I immersed
blevpw I see e[bleya I saw
givnomai I become ejgenovmhn I became
ginwvskw I know e[gnwn I knew
didavskw I teach ejdivdaxa I taught
e[rcomai I come, go h[lqon I came, went
ejsqivw I eat e[fagon I ate
e[cw I have e[scon I had
qerapeuvw I heal ejqeravpeusa I healed
khruvssw I proclaim ejkhvruxa I proclaimed
lambavnw I take, receive e[labon I took, received
levgw I say ei\pon I said
leivpw I leave e[lipon I left
manqavnw I learn e[maqon I learned
pavscw I suffer e[paqon I suffered
peivqw I persuade e[peisa I persuaded
pevmpw I send e[pemya I sent

pivptw I fall e[peson I fell
pisteuvw I believe ejpivsteusa I believed
swv/zw I save e[swsa I saved
fevrw I bear, bring h[negka
h[negkon I bore, I brought
1) Note that e[rcomai is ordinarily deponent, but takes active forms in the
aorist.
2) The verbs aJmartavnw and fevrw have both first and second aorist forms.
13.2 The Aorist Tense

The aorist is a secondary (past) tense but, unlike the imperfect, it does
not express progressive action. Rather, it simply indicates that an action
took place in the past (see section 13.6 below). The aorist corresponds
generally to the English simple past tense, which is formed in one of two
ways. English verbs normally form the past tense by adding ed to the
end of the verb: I help (present), I helped (past). Some verbs, how-
ever, change their spelling when forming the past tense: I see (present),
I saw (past). Greek likewise has two ways of forming the aorist tense.
Most Greek verbs add s to the augmented aorist stem and then add
personal endings. Such verbs are called first aorist, or weak aorist.
Other Greek verbs do not add s but change the spelling of the stem and
then add personal endings. These verbs are called second aorist, or
strong aorist. The difference between first and second aorist is one of
form only. They are not separate tenses. A few Greek verbs have both a
first and a second aorist. Examples from this lessons vocabulary are
aJmartavnw and fevrw, but note that with these verbs there is no differ-
ence in meaning between the first and second aorist forms. In rare cases,
as will be seen later in the course, the first aorist has a meaning that is
different than that of the second aorist but this is the exception rather
than the rule. Because it is a past tense, the aorist takes an augment and
uses the secondary personal endings presented in Chapter 11.
Aorist Active and Middle Indicative 89
13.3 Forms of the First Aorist Active and Middle

Indicative
1) First Aorist Active Indicative of luvw
Formula: e (augment) + lu (aorist stem) + s (aorist tense sign) +

a (connecting vowel) + s (personal ending) = e[lusa~ (you loosed).
Singular Plural
e[lusa I loosed ejluvsamen we loosed
e[lusa~ you loosed ejluvsate you loosed
e[luse(n) he/she/it loosed e[lusan they loosed
a) These are the secondary endings presented in Chapter 11

except for the first person singular, which has no ending.
For this reason, the third person singular changes from a to
e to distinguish the first and third person singular forms.
b) Note that the connecting vowel is a rather than o.
c) The aorist stem of luvw is the same as the present stem, but
this is not true of all Greek verbs. The root of a verb is most
often seen in the aorist tense.
d) A few Greek verbs add k to the aorist stem instead of s. For

example, the first aorist form of fevrw is h[negka.
e) The s that is added to the first aorist stem interacts with the
consonant preceding it. The resulting changes are generally
the same as those that are encountered in the future tense
(see Chapter 12). Examples: eJtoimavzw (present), eJtoivmasa
(aorist) and blevpw (present), e[bleya (aorist).
2) First Aorist Middle Indicative of luvw
As in the future tense, the middle and passive forms of the aorist are
different and must be learned separately. The formula for forming the
aorist middle is the same as the active, except that secondary middle
endings are used.
Singular
ejlusavmhn I loosed (for) myself
ejluvsw you loosed (for) yourself
ejluvsato he/she/it loosed (for)
Plural
ejlusavmeqa we loosed (for) ourselves
ejluvsasqe you loosed (for) yourselves
ejluvsanto they loosed (for) themselves
The secondary second person singular ending is so. Here, the s drops
out and the connecting vowel a contracts with the ending o, so that
ejluvsaso becomes ejluvsw. For the principles of contraction, see Chapter
17.
13.4 Forms of the Second Aorist Active and

Middle Indicative
The second aorist, sometimes called strong aorist, is recognized by
the spelling of the stem, which is usually the root of the verb itself. Once
you have determined that you have the second aorist form of the verb
you can find the stem by removing the augment and the personal ending.
You cannot determine from the lexical form of a verb whether it is first
or second aorist. Rather, you must consult a lexicon or a principal parts
list. The third principal part is the aorist active indicative.
1) Second Aorist Active Indicative of leivpw
Singular Plural
e[lipon I left ejlivpomen we left
e[lipe~ you left ejlivpete you left
e[lipe(n) he/she/it left e[lipon they left
a) The second aorist uses the normal connecting vowel (o or e)

and the secondary endings.
b) Note that the only difference in form between the second

aorist and the imperfect is that the imperfect is built on the
present stem, whereas the second aorist is built on the aorist
stem. The imperfect active indicative first singular of leivpw
is e[leipon; the second aorist active indicative of leivpw is
e[lipon. Be careful not to confuse the two!
c) Although almost all Greek verbs have either a first aorist or

second aorist form, a few verbs have both forms. One ex-
ample from the vocabulary study is fevrw, which has both
h[negka (first aorist) and h[negkon (second aorist). Both the
first aorist and second aorist forms are translated I bore, I
brought. Another example is aJ m artav n w, which has
hJmavrthsa (first aorist) and h{marton (second aorist). Both
are translated I sinned.
d) It is recommended that when parsing you distinguish be-

tween first and second aorist, at least in the early stages of
study, so that you can learn to recognize the difference be-
tween the two forms.
2) Second Aorist Middle Indicative of leivpw
The second aorist middle indicative is formed like the active except
that the secondary middle personal endings are used.
Singular Plural
ejlipovmhn I left (for) myself ejlipovmeqa we left (for) ourselves
ejlivpou you left (for) yourself ejlivpesqe you left (for) yourselves
ejlivpeto he/she/it left (for) ejlivponto they left (for) themselves
13.5 Irregular Aorist Forms

Because of the historical development of the Greek language, some sec-
ond aorist forms are entirely different from their present tense forms.
For example, the second aorist of levgw is ei\pon. ei\don is used as the
second aorist for both blevpw and oJravw. Since blevpw also has the first
aorist form e[bleya, we will treat ei\don as the second aorist of oJravw,
which is presented in Chapter 17. Both ei\pon and ei\don, although sec-
ond aorist in form, often appear in the New Testament with first aorist
endings (see Jn. 10:34 and Acts 4:20). Also note that the verbs ginwvskw
and ajnabaivnw do not form the second aorist according to the normal
pattern:

e[gnwn e[gnwmen ajnevbhn ajnevbhmen
e[gnw~ e[gnwte ajnevbh~ ajnevbhte
e[gnw e[gnwsan ajnevbh ajnevbhsan
It is wise to look up the aorist form of a Greek verb in a lexicon or

principal parts list, rather than attempting to guess what its aorist form
might be. The aorist active indicative is the third of the six principal
parts of the Greek verb. Both the aorist active and the aorist middle are
represented by this principal art. The aorist passive is built on the sixth
principal part (see Chapter 14).
13.6 Uses of the Aorist Tense

The aorist is the most commonly encountered tense in the Greek New
Testament, just edging out the present tense in total number of occur-
rences. Both the imperfect and the aorist are secondary tenses and in the
indicative mood they describe action that is taking place in past time.
The difference between the two tenses is in the kind of action they de-
scribe. In contrast to the imperfect, which views the action of the verb as
an ongoing process, the aorist presents the action in summary, viewed as
a whole. The aorist takes no interest in the process of the action and
makes no statement about the results of the action. Whereas the imper-
fect tense presents the action as a moving picture, the aorist presents
the action as a snapshot. The aorist often simply states that something
occurred in the past. The usual way to translate the aorist is with the
English simple past tense: He read the book. He did not read the
book. The following uses of the aorist are usually noted by grammarians:
1) The constantive aorist views the action as a whole, in its

entirety. Example: Five times I received from the Jews
thirty-nine lashes (2 Cor. 11:24). Although Paul received

the lashes over a period of time, the action is viewed here as
a whole, rather than as a process.
2) The culminative aorist emphasizes the conclusion of the ac-

tion. Example: The chief priests and the elders persuaded
the multitudes to ask for Barabbas, and to put Jesus to death
(Mt. 27:20). Although the persuasion took time, the focus
here is on the conclusion of the action, i.e., that the multi-
tudes were persuaded to release Barabbas rather than Jesus.
3) The ingressive aorist focuses on the beginning of the action.

Example: He poured water into the basin and began to wash
the disciples feet. . . (Jn. 13:5). Here, the focus is not on
the process of the action, or on its results, but on the begin-
ning of the action.
See the Verses for Application section below for more examples of
these uses of the aorist tense in the New Testament. Other specific uses
of the aorist tense are best left for intermediate and advanced language
study.

Mt. 15:31 2 Cor. 8:9
Mt. 27:20 Phil. 4:11
Jn. 1:14 Tit. 3:5
13.8 Exercises
1. e[lusan oiJ profjh`tai tou;~ ponhrou;~ douvlou~.
2. hjkouvsate th;n fwnh;n tou` kuvriou.
3. ejkhvruxe oJ ajpovstolo~ toi`~ aJmartwloi`~ to; eujaggevlion.
4. h[negke~ dw`ra toi`~ maqhtai`~;
5. oiJ ponhroi; ejluvsanto para; tw` iJerw`/.
6. aiJ pistai; eijshvlqhsan eij~ th;n ejkklhsivan kai; ejdovxasan to;n

kuvrion.
7. to;n movnon a[rton ejfavgete.
8. e[ti e[sce~ aJmartivan ejn th`/ kardiva/ sou.
9. oiJ divkaioi sunhvgagon para; tw`/ aujtw`/ oi[kw/.
10. oJ kuvrio~ ejxevbale ta; daimovnia ejk tou` tevknou.
11. oJ maqhth;~ ajpevqanen ejn th`/ ejrhvmw/.
12. oiJ me;n pistoi; ejdovxasan to;n qeo;n, oiJ de; ponhroi; profh`tai
ejdoxavsanto.
13. th;n ajlhvqeian tw`n grafw`n e[maqon.
14. ajnevbh oJ telwvnh~ pro;~ to; iJerovn.
15. e[gnw~ tou;~ ajnqrwvpou~ ejn tw`/ oi[kw/ tou` ajdelfou` sou;
Chapter 14
Aorist and Future Passive Indicative

14.1 Vocabulary
a[gw I lead h[cqhn I was led
ai[rw I take up, take away h[rqhn I was taken up
ajkouvw I hear hjkouvsqhn I was heard
ajpokrivnomai I answer ajpekrivqhn I answered
ajpostevllw I send ajpestavlhn I was sent
bavllw I throw ejblhvqhn I was thrown
givnomai I become ejgenhvqhn I became
ginwvskw I know ejgnwvsqhn I was known
gravfw I write ejgravfhn I was written
didavskw I teach ejdidavcqhn I was taught
diwvkw I pursue, persecute ejdiwvcqhn I was pursued
doxavzw I glorify ejdoxavsqhn I was glorified
ejgeivrw I raise up hjgevrqhn I was raised up
eJtoimavzw I prepare hJtoimavsqhn I was prepared
euJrivskw I find euJrevqhn I was found
khruvssw I proclaim ejkhruvcqhn I was proclaimed
krivnw I judge ejkrivqhn I was judged
lambavnw I take, receive ejlhvmfqhn I was taken
levgw I say ejrrevqhn (I) was said
leivpw I leave ejleivfqhn I was left
peivqw I persuade ejpeivsqhn I was persuaded
pevmpw I send ejpevmfqhn I was sent
poreuvomai I go ejporeuvqhn I went
swv/zw I save ejswvqhn I was saved
14.2 Aorist Passive Indicative

The aorist passive indicative is built on the aorist passive stem, the sixth
principal part of the Greek verb. As in the active voice, there are both
first and second aorist passive forms.
14.3 Forms of the First Aorist Passive Indicative

The first aorist passive indicative is rather easily recognized. It is formed
by adding qh to the augmented stem, followed by the secondary active
(not passive) personal endings. Remember that the aorist passive stem
often differs from the present stem and must be learned as a separate
form.
First Aorist Passive Indicative of luvw

Singular Plural
ejluvqhn I was loosed ejluvqhmen we were loosed
ejluvqh~ you were loosed ejluvqhte you were loosed
ejluvqh he/she/it was loosed ejluvqhsan they were loosed
In both the aorist passive and the future passive the addition of q to a
stem that ends in a consonant produces certain changes, which generally
occur as follows:
k, g, c + q = cq a[gwh[cqhn
p, b, q + q = fq leivpwejleivfqhn
t, d, q + q = sq peivqwejpeivsqhn
z, x, y + q = sq doxavzwejdoxavsqhn
(an exception: sw/vzwejswvqhn)
n+q=q krivnwejkrivqhn
l + q = lq ajggevllwhjggevlqhn
r + q = rq ai[rwh[rqhn
Aorist and Future Passive Indicative 97
14.4 Forms of the Second Aorist Passive

Indicative
The second aorist passive has the same endings as the first aorist active,
but it does not add q to the augmented stem. Do not assume that a verb
with a first aorist active form also has a first aorist passive form. Some
verbs have first aorist active but second aorist passive forms and vice
versa. Examples: gravfw has e[graya (first aorist active) and ejgravfhn
(second aorist passive); leivpw has e[lipon (second aorist active) and
ejleivfqhn (first aorist passive).
Second Aorist Passive Indicative of gravfw

Singular Plural
ejgravfhn I was written ejgravfhmen we were written
ejgravfh~ you were written ejgravfhte you were written
ejgravfh he/she/it was written ejgravfhsan they were written
As in the active voice, the difference between first and second aorist
is one of form only. Both first and second aorist simply state that the
subject received action in past time. See Chapter 13 for the uses of the
aorist tense.
14.5 Future Passive Indicative

The future passive indicative is built on the aorist passive stem, the sixth
principal part of the Greek verb. However, there is no augment because
the future passive does not express past time. It takes the same endings
as the future middle indicative. As in the aorist passive, there are both
first future passive and second future passive forms. Like the future
active, the future passive expresses action received by the subject in
future time. Context determines whether the kind of action is progres-
sive or summary. See Chapter 12 for the uses of the future tense in
Greek.
14.6 First Future Passive Indicative of luvw

Singular Plural
luqhvsomai I will be loosed luqhsovmeqa we will be loosed
luqhvsh/ you will be loosed luqhvsesqe you will be loosed
luqhvsetai he/she/it will be loosed luqhvsontai they will be loosed
Note that the presence of qh in the first future passive indicative is all
that distinguishes it from the future middle indicative.
14.7 Second Future Passive Indicative of gravfw

Singular Plural
grafhvsomai I will be written grafhsovmeqa we will be written
grafhvsh/ you will be written grafhvsesqe you will be written
grafhvsetai he/she/it grafhvsontai they will be written
will be written
If a verb has a second aorist passive it will not have q in its future passive
forms.
14.8 Deponent Verbs in the Aorist

Deponent verbs have a variety of forms in the aorist. Some have no
aorist middle forms, but do have aorist passive forms. Example:
poreuvomai (present), ejporeuvqhn (aorist). Some deponent verbs have
both middle and passive forms in the aorist. An example is givnomai,
which has both ejgenovmhn (second aorist middle) and ejgenhvqhn (first
aorist passive). Both are translated I became. Another example is
aj p okriv n omai, which has aj p ekrinav m hn (first aorist middle) and
ajpekrivqhn (first aorist passive), but ajpekrivqhn appears more frequently
in the New Testament. Both forms are translated I answered. Remem-
ber that although deponent verbs have middle and/or passive forms, they
are translated as if they are active.
Aorist and Future Passive Indicative 99

Mt. 5:4, 6, 7, 9 Jn. 3:10
Lk.11:9 Rev. 20:7
Jn. 2:20
14.10 Exercises
1. oiJ ajpovstoloi ejdidavcqhsan uJpo; tw`n ajggevlwn tou` qeou`.
2. oJi a[nqrwpoi eijsh`lqon eij~ th;n ejkklhsivan su;n toi`~ uiJoi`~.
3. ajpestavlhsan oiJ maqhtai; ejk tou` iJerou` kai; eij~ to;n kovsmon.
4. oJ Cristo;~ doxasqhvsetai dia; ta;~ ejkklhsiva~ aujtou`.
5. oiJ lovgoi ejgravfhsan ejn tw`/ bivbliw/.
6. oiJ aJmartwloi; ejswvqhsan dia; th;~ ajgavph~ tou` qeou`.
7. oJ profhvth~ hjkouvsqh ejn th`/ ejrhvmw/;
8. meta; tau`ta oiJ maqhtai; ejleivfqhsan para; tw`/ oijkw` tou` telwvnou.
9. oJ a[rto~ ejlhvmfqh ejn tw`/ iJerw`/;
10. h\~ aJmartwlo;~ ajlla; ejgevnou maqhth;~ tou` kuvriou.
11. ejn ejkeivnh/ th`/ hJmevra/ oiJ pistoi; didacqhvsontai uJpÆ aujtou` tou`
kuvriou.
12. to; eujaggevlion ejkhruvcqh uJpo; tou` maqhtou` toi`~ o[cloi`~.
13. touvtoi oiJ lovgoi ejrrevqhsan peri; th`~ basileiva~ tou` qeou`.
14. euJrevqh to; tevknon para; potamw`/.
15. ta; dw`ra lhmfqhvsetai uJpo; tou` pistou` profhvtou.

(page 100 blank)
Chapter 15
Third Declension Nouns

15.1 Vocabulary
Liquid Stems:
aijwvn, aijw`no~, oJ age*

ajnhvr, ajndrov~, oJ man, male, husband
qugavthr, qugatrov~, hJ daughter
mhvthr, mhtrov~, hJ mother
pathvr, patrov~, oJ father
swthvr, swth`ro~, oJ savior
Mute stems:
a[rcwn, a[rconto~, oJ ruler

gunhv, gunaikov~, hJ woman, wife
ejlpiv~, ejlpivdo~, hJ hope
nuvx, nuktov~, hJ night
savrx, sarkov~, hJ flesh
cavri~, cavrito~, hJ grace
* eij~ to;n aijwn` a is translated forever, and eij~ tou;~ aijwn` a~ tw`n aijwnv wn
is translated forever and ever.
Vowel stems:
ajnavstasi~, ajnastavsew~, hJ resurrection

ajrciereuv~, ajrcierevw~, oJ chief priest, high priest
gnw`si~, gnwvsew~, hJ knowledge
grammateuv~, grammatevw~, oJ scribe
duvnami~, dunavmew~, hJ power
iJereuv~, iJerevw~, oJ priest
krivsi~, krivsew~, hJ judgment
pivsti~, pivstew~, hJ faith
povli~, povlew~, hJ city
ijcquv~, ijcquvo~, oJ fish
Neuter nouns:
ai|ma, ai{mato~, tov blood

qevlhma, qelhvmato~, tov will
o[noma, onovmato~, tov name
pneu`ma, pneuvmato~, tov spirit, Spirit
rJh`ma, rJhvmato~, tov word, saying
stovma, stovmato~, tov stomach
sw`ma, swvmato~, tov body
u{dwr, u{dato~, tov water
gevno~, gevnou~, tov offspring, kind, nation, race
e[qno~, e[qnou~, tov nation
(pl.Gentiles, pagans)
e[leo~, e[leou~, tov mercy
15.2 Third Declension Nouns

Thus far we have presented the first and second declensions of Greek
nouns. First declension nouns are mostly feminine, with a few masculines.
This declension is often called the a stem declension because the a
(alpha) sound predominates in the endings. Second declension nouns are
mostly masculine and neuter, with a few feminines. It is often called the
o stem declension because the o (omicron) sound predominates. In
both the first and second declensions the stem of a noun is derived from
the nominative singular.
Third Declension Nouns 103
The third declension includes nouns of all three genders, with a va-
riety of stems. The stem of a third declension noun is derived not from
the nominative singular, but from the genitive singular by removing the
ending, which is usually -o~. For this reason, both the nominative and
genitive singular forms of third declension nouns will be given in the
vocabulary lists. It is best to learn both forms, along with the article, as
part of your vocabulary study because you cannot always determine the
gender of a third declension noun by looking at its nominative singular
form.
15.3 Forms of Third Declension Nouns

Although you will encounter spelling changes in the stems, the basic
third declension endings are:
Masculine and Feminine

Singular Plural
N -~ (or none) -e~
GA -o~ -wn
DLI -i -si(n)
AC -a or -n -a~
V none or same as nom.
Neuter
Singular Plural
NV none -a
GA -o~ -wn
DLI -i -si(n)
AC none -a
Third declension nouns are grouped together by stem type, but there
are so many variations that the total number of possible paradigms (ex-
amples) is imposing. Because your goal is to recognize third declension
nouns rather than to recite them from memory, you should become fa-
miliar with the paradigms of some representative nouns of this declen-
sion. But before looking at specific examples, please note the following
about third declension Greek nouns:
1) Certain changes occur in the dative/locative/instrumental plural form

when the stem ends in a consonant. This is the result of a consonant
combining with the s of the si ending. Some of these changes are the
same as those that are encountered when forming the future tense (see
Chapter 12):
p, b, f + si = yi
k, g, c + si = xi
t, d, and q drop out, leaving si
2) Other changes are:
n drops out, leaving si
nt drops out, leaving si
ant + si = asi
ent + si = eisi
ont + si = ousi
Look for these changes in the paradigms to follow, but keep in mind
that other less predictable changes may also occur. You must deal with
these changes as you encounter them in language study and exegesis.
15.4 Paradigms of Third Declension Nouns

Become familiar with the following paradigms, which are representative
of the patterns for third declension nouns. The vocative forms are not
given because they are usually the same as the nominative. This section
presents examples for liquid and mute consonant stems, vowel stems,
and neuter nouns. These classifications serve the purpose of grouping
nouns for study. Because your goal is to recognize third declension nouns,
focus your attention on the representative nouns presented here and do
not attempt to memorize all the various types of stems.
1) Mute Stem Nouns
These nouns may be either masculine or feminine and are declined as

follows:
Singular Plural
N ejlpiv~ ejlpivde~
GA ejlpivdo~ ejlpivdwn
DLI ejlpivdi ejlpivsi(n)
AC ejlpivda ejlpivda~
Singular Plural
N cavri~ cavrite~
GA cavrito~ cavritwn
DLI cavriti cavrisi(n)
AC cavrin cavrita~
Singular Plural
N a[rcwn a[rconte~
GA a[rconto~ ajrcovntwn
DLI a[rconti a[rcousi(n)
AC a[rconta a[rconta~
Note that the accusative singular of cavri~ is cavrin. The accusative

singular ending is normally a, but n occurs when the mute stem ends in
t, d, or q preceded by i or u and the noun is not accented on the ultima
in the nominative singular.
2) Liquid Stem Nouns
These nouns are mostly masculine, with a few feminines. Examples are
shown below.
Singular Plural
N aijwvn aijw`ne~
GA aijw`no~ aijwvnwn
DLI aijw`ni aijw`si(n)
AC aijw`na aijw`na~
Singular Plural
N pathvr patevre~
GA patrov~ patevrwn
DLI patriv patravsi(n)
AC patevra patevra~
Note the changes of spelling in the forms of patrov~, which occur ac-
cording to a recognizable pattern. The same changes occur with mhvthr
and qugavthr.
3) Vowel Stem Nouns
There are three classes of vowel stem third declension nouns and
they are declined as follows:
a) i stem nouns are feminine and are declined like pivsti~:

Singular Plural
N pivsti~ pivstei~
GA pivstew~ pivstewn
DLI pivstei pivstesi(n)
AC pivstin pivstei~
b) eu stem nouns are masculine and are declined like iJereuv~:

Singular Plural
N iJereuv~ iJerei`~
GA iJerevw~ iJerevwn
DLI iJereiv iJereu`si(n)
AC iJereva iJerei`~
c) u stem nouns are mostly masculine, with a few feminines and one
neuter: davkru, davkruo~ (a tear). An example of this type is ijcquv~:
Singular Plural
N ijcquv~ ijcquve~
GA ijcquvo~ ijcquvwn
DLI ijcquvi ijcquvsi(n)
AC ijcquvn ijcquva~
Note that vowel stem nouns deviate from the basic pattern of third de-
clension endings. This is because of the principles of contraction, which
are presented in Chapter 17.
4) Neuter Nouns
a) Most third declension neuter nouns follow the pattern of sw`ma:
Singular Plural
N sw`ma swvmata
GA swvmato~ swmavtwn
DLI swvmati swvmasi(n)
AC sw`ma swvmata
b) Some third declension neuter nouns follow the pattern of gevno~:
Singular Plural
N gevno~ gevnh
GA gevnou~ genw`n
D LI gevnei gevnesi(n)
AC gevno~ gevnh
The stem of this class of nouns actually ends in e, which contracts with
the neuter third declension endings and results in the endings seen in the
paradigm above.
Keep in mind that there are a number of third declension nouns that
are irregular and cannot be classified according to the groups given above.
These are best learned by observation during exegesis.
15.5 Additional Remarks About Third Declension

Nouns
Up to this point in your study, the world of the Greek noun has been
relatively uncomplicated. With few exceptions, it was an easy matter to
determine the declension and gender of a noun. With the introduction of
the third declension, the waters of the Greek noun have been mud-
died a bit. For example, the -o~ ending no longer is a clear indicator
that you have a second declension masculine noun or, possibly, a second
declension feminine noun, in the nominative case. Rather, you might

have the genitive singular of a third declension noun of any gender. This
should present little difficulty, however, because Greek nouns seldom
occur in a vacuum. An accompanying article or other modifiers will help
you sort it all out. And take heart! You have now learned all three noun
declensions and you will have plenty of practice in applying what you
have learned.

Jn. 3:1 1 Cor. 13:13
Jn. 11:25 Tit. 1:4
Acts 1:5 Rev. 22:5
15.7 Exercises
1. ei[pe oJ ÆIhsou`~ o{ti Egwv eijmi hJ ajnavstasi~ kai; hJ zwhv.
2. th;n ejlpivda oujk e[cousin o{ti ouj ginwvskousi to;n kuvrion.
3. oJ pisto;~ ajpovstolo~ ejkhvruxe to; eujaggevlion kai; ejn th`/ hJmevra/

kai; ejn th`/ nuktiv.
4. tau`tav eijsi ta; rJhvmata tou` Messivou;
5. oiJ uiJoi; e[labon to;n ajgaqo;n a[rton ajpo; th`~ mhtro;~ aujtw`n.
6. oJ uiJo~
; tou` ajnqrwvpou e{xei th;n duvnamin th`~ krivsew~ ejn th`/ e[scath/
hJmevra/.
7. to; a{gion pneuvma a[gei tou;~ ajnqrwvpou~ pro;~ th;n basileivan

tw`n oujranw`n.
8. e[comen th;n ejlpivda dia; tou` ojnovmato~ tou` kuvriou.
9. tou;~ ajgaqou;~ profhvta~ ajpevkteinon oiJ ponhroi; a[rconte~.
10. th;n ajgavphn tou` qeou` blevpomen dia; to;n qavnaton tou` uiJou` aujtou`.
11. oiJ iJerei`~ eijsevrcontai eij~ th;n povlin, oiJ de; grammatei`~
eijsevrcontai eij~ th;n e[rhmon.
12. kai; oJ lovgo~ savrx ejgevneto.
13. oiJ maqhtai; e[fagon kai; tou;~ ijcquva~ kai; to;n a[rton.
14. hJ ajgavph tou` qeou` mevnei eij~ to;n aijw`na.
15. hJ qugavthr ejdidavcqh th;n ajgavphn uJpo; th`~ mhtro;~ aujth`~.

16. dia; th;n ajnavstasin tou` Cristou` hJ duvnami~ tou` patro;~

doxavzetai.
17. ejn tw`/ novmw/ e[rcetai hJ gnwvsi~ th`~ dunavmew~ aJmartiva~.
18. h\men ponhroi; a[nqrwpoi ajllÆ ejswvqhmen ejn th`/ cavriti aujtou`.
Chapter 16
Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative

16.1 Vocabulary
ajkouvw I hear ajkhvkoa I have heard
aJmartavnw I sin hJmavrthka I have sinned
bavllw I throw bevblhka I have thrown
baptivzw I immerse bebavptismai I have been immersed
givnomai I become gevgona I have become
ginwvskw I know e[gnwka I have known
gravfw I write gevgrafa I have written
ejggivzw I come near h[ggika I have come near
ejgeivrw I raise up ejghvgermai I have been raised up
ejlpivzw I hope h[lpika I have hoped
e[rcomai I come, go ejlhvluqa I have come/gone
eJtoimavzw I prepare hJtoivmaka I have prepared
euJrivskw I find eu{rhka I have found
e[cw I have e[schka I have had
qerapeuvw I heal teqeravpeuka I have healed
levgw I say, speak ei[rhka I have said, spoken
luvw I loose, destroy levluka I have loosed
peivqw I persuade pevpoiqa I have persuaded
pevmpw I send pevpomfa I have sent
pisteuvw I believe pepivsteuka I have believed
sw/vzw I save sevswka I have saved
(1) baptivzw and ejgeivrw do not appear in the perfect active in the New
Testament.
(2) Both givnomai and e[rcomai have active forms in the perfect tense.
16.2 Forms of the Perfect Active Indicative

So far we have studied four principal parts of the Greek verb: the present
active (first), the future active (second), the aorist active (third), and the
aorist passive (sixth). This lesson introduces the fourth and fifth princi-
pal partsthe perfect active and the perfect middle/passive, respectively.
The perfect active indicative of luvw is formed as follows:
Singular Plural
levluka I have loosed leluvkamen we have loosed
levluka~ you have loosed leluvkate you have loosed
levluke(n) he/she/it has loosed leluvkasi(n) they have loosed
(or levlukan)
In the New Testament leluvkasi appears more frequently than levlukan.
The distinguishing features of the perfect active are: reduplication of

the stem, the tense sign (k), and the personal ending. The most recogniz-
able feature is reduplication. If the verb begins with a single consonant,
that consonant is reduplicated, or doubled, and an e is inserted between
them (see the example of luvw, above). After reduplication a k is affixed
to the stem before personal endings are added. The perfect tense is a
primary tense and so uses primary endings, but because a is used in the
tense formation, the perfect active endings resemble those of the first
aorist active. Since the perfect is a primary tense, there is no augment.
Notes on the process of reduplication:
1) The consonants f, q, c are reduplicated with their smoother

counterpartsp, t, k.
Example: qerapeuvwteqeravpeuka.
2) Verbs beginning with a vowel or diphthong reduplicate by

lengthening the vowel .
Example: ejlpivzwh[lpika. This is not an augment.
3) Verbs beginning with two consonants, a double consonant,

or r usually reduplicate by adding an e. Again, this is not an
augment .
Example: ginwvskwe[gnwka.
Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative 113
4) In compound verbs reduplication occurs between the prepo-

sition and the verb.
Example: ejxevrcomaiejxelhvluqa.
Some Greek verbs form the perfect tense without k and are called sec-
ond perfects. Examples: pevmpwpevpomfa; ajkouvwajkhvkoa; peivqw
pevpoiqa; gravfwgevgrafa. As with first and second aorist, the differ-
ence between first and second perfect is one of form only. They function
in exactly the same manner.
It should be noted that not all Greek verbs form their perfect tense in
the ways indicated above. It is wise to check a principal parts list or
lexicon to be certain of a verbs perfect tense form.
16.3 Forms of the Perfect Middle and Passive

Indicative
The perfect middle and passive indicative forms are identical. Redupli-
cation occurs, as in the perfect active, and the primary passive/middle
endings are used. For this reason, the perfect passive and middle end-
ings resemble those of the present passive and middle indicative. Note
that the perfect passive and middle endings are added directly to the
stem, without a connecting vowel. For the verb luvw the perfect passive
and middle indicative endings are:
Singular
levlumai I have been loosed,
have loosed for myself
levlusai you have been loosed,
have loosed for yourself
levlutai he has been loosed,
has loosed for himself
Plural
leluvmeqa we have been loosed,
have loosed for ourselves
levlusqe you have been loosed,
have loosed for yourselves
levluntai they have been loosed,
have loosed for themselves
It should be noted that certain changes occur when the perfect passive
and middle endings are added to verb stems ending in a consonant. An
example is the verb gravfw, which has gevgrammai in the first person
singular, but has gevgraptai in the third person singular. These types of
changes are best left for more advanced study. The various forms are
fairly easy to recognize once you know the principal part of a given
verb.
16.4 Uses of the Perfect Tense

The perfect has been called the most theologically significant tense of
the Greek verb system and it is perhaps not an overstatement to say that
it is the most important Greek tense for the purposes of exegesis. Most
basically, the perfect tense refers to a state resulting from a past action.
It describes an action that was fully completed in the past, yet has present
day consequences. Note that this is in relation to the time of the speaker
or writer and not the reader. Such action is called perfected action.
For example, if I had a pet turtle and I simply set it free in the
woods, I would use the aorist tense to describe this action in Greek.
Whether or not the turtle remained free is uncertain. If, however, I
wanted to show that I had set the turtle free and it is still free, I would
use the Greek perfect tense. Consider 1 Cor. 15:4, where Paul says that
Christ died for our sins, was buried, and was raised on the third day.
Both died and was buried are in the aorist tense. Paul is simply
stating the fact that Jesus did indeed die and was buried. The verb was
raised is in the perfect tense, indicating that Jesus was not only raised
by the Father but that he remained in a risen state at the time of Pauls
writing this verse. And so we can say with confidence that we serve a
risen Savior! In 1 Cor. 15:4 the shift in tense from aorist to perfect is
extremely important for exegesis.
The true nature of the Greek perfect tense is more easily seen in the
passive than in the active voice. An example is the frequently encoun-
tered expression It is written, used to introduce Old Testament quota-
tions in the New Testament. The idea is that what the prophet wrote has
continued in written form down to the time of the New Testament and
remains valid at the time of the New Testament authors writing, i. e.,
it is written and stands written. It therefore remains valid for us today.
A good example of the perfect is found in Jn. 19:30, where Jesus says
It is finished. Our Lord was saying that his work had been completed
and that it has lasting results. He had done the work the Father had sent
him to do and good works, church rituals, etc., are not to be added to the
finished work of Christ, which has accomplished our salvation. Christs
work is finished and stands finished!
Since no English tense corresponds exactly to the Greek perfect, it is
recommended that you translate this tense in one of the following ways:
1) Use the helping verb has or have and the past perfect
form of the English verb (I have eaten). This translation
will help you to distinguish the perfect from the aorist.
2) Use the English present tense when the existing results are
emphasized (It is written).
16.5 The Pluperfect Tense

The pluperfect is the least frequently encountered tense in the Greek
New Testament. It occurs less than 90 times and is introduced here for
purposes of recognition only. Like the imperfect, the pluperfect tense is
a true past tense and occurs only in the indicative mood. It is the past
tense counterpart of the perfect tense. The perfect tense describes an
event that was completed in the past but has results existing in the present,
from the point of view of the speaker or writer. Example: The student
has learned the new Greek vocabulary words. Here, the sense is that
the student learned the words at some point in the past and still knows
them at the time of speaking. The pluperfect tense, on the other hand,
describes an event that was completed in the past and had results that
existed in the past as well, again with reference to the speaker or writer.
Example: Last week the student had learned the new Greek vocabulary
words. In this case, the student had learned the words at some point in
the past and he continued to know them up to some point in the past, but
whether he still knows them at the time of speaking is uncertain. Whether
or not the results exist up to the time of speaking or writing is not indi-
cated by the pluperfect tense itself, but might be learned from the con-
text. See Jn 9:22 in the Verses for Application section, below.
16.6 Forms of the Pluperfect

The pluperfect is built on the perfect stem, to which secondary endings
are added. The pluperfect does not always have an augment in the New
Testament. It can be identified by reduplication and its distinctive endings.
Pluperfect Active Indicative of luvw

Singular Plural
(ej)leluvkein I had loosed (ej)leluvkeimen we had loosed
(ej)leluvkei~ you had loosed (ej)leluvkeite you had loosed
(ej)leluvkei he/she/it had loosed (ej)leluvkeisan they had loosed
Pluperfect Passive and Middle Indicative of luvw

Singular
(ej)leluvmnhn I had been loosed,
had loosed for myself
(ej)levluso you had been loosed,
had loosed for yourself
(ej)levluto he had been loosed,
had loosed for himself
Plural
(ej)leluvmeqa we had been loosed,
had loosed for ourselves
(ej)levlusqe you had been loosed,
had loosed for yourselves
(ej)levlunto they had been loosed,
had loosed for themselves
16.7 A Review of the Principal Parts of the Greek

Verb
All six principal parts of the Greek verb have now been presented. They
are: present active, future active, aorist active, perfect active, perfect
passive, and aorist passive. They appear in this order in principal parts
lists. To review, all presents and imperfects are formed on the first
principal part, the future active and middle are formed on the second,
the aorist active and middle are formed on the third, the perfect active is
formed on the fourth, the perfect middle and passive are formed on the
fifth, and the aorist and future passives are formed on the sixth. If a verb
does not use one or more tense system, that form is left blank in the
principal parts list. Such verbs are sometimes called defective verbs.

Mk. 5:34 Acts 2:2/5:28
Jn. 1:41 2 Cor. 12:9
Jn. 9:22 Heb. 1:4
Jn. 19:22
16.9 Exercises
1. ajkhkovate th;n ajlhvqeian ajpÆ aujtou` tou` profhvtou.
2. ginwvskomen o{ti seswvsmeqa th`/ cavriti tou` qeou`.
3. oJ kuvrio~ bevblhke ta; daimovnia ejk tou` ajnqrwvpou.
4. pepisteuvkamen o{ti su; ei\ oJ uiJo;~ tou` qeou`.
5. oiJ pistoi; profh`tai hJtoimavkasin to;n oJdo;n tou` Cristou`.
6. oJ a[nqrwpo~ bebavptistai uJpo; tou` maqhtou`.
7. oiJ ponhroi; dou`loi leluvkasin tou;~ oi[kou~ tw`n ajpovstolwn.
8. gegovnate ta; tevkna tou` qeou`.
9. hJ hJmevra tou` kuvriou h[ggike.
10. oJ uiJo;~ tou` qeou` teqeravpeuke ta; tevkna th`~ gunaikov~.
11. th;n ajlhvqeian ei[rhka~;
12. ejlhvluqa ejn tw`/ ojnovmati tou` qeou`.
13. pepisteuvkate eij~ tou;~ lovgou~ tou` didavskalou;
14. aiJ qugavtere~ eijselhluvqasin eij~ th;n ejkklhsivan.
15. kai; oiJ a[ndre~ kai; aiJ gunai`ke~ levluntai uJpo; tou` ponhrou`
profhvtou.
Chapter 17
Contract Verbs
17.1 Vocabulary
ajgapavw I love (place supreme value on)
aijtevw I ask
gennavw I beget, I give birth to
dhlovw I show
eujlogevw I bless
eujcaristevw I give thanks (with dative)
zavw I live
zhtevw I seek
qewrevw I see, I perceive, I behold
kalevw I call
lalevw I say, I speak
marturevw I bear witness
oJravw I see
parakalevw I exhort, I comfort, I urge
peripatevw I walk about, I live
plhrovw I fill, I fulfill
poievw I do, I make
staurovw I crucify
threvw I keep
timavw I honor
fanerovw I reveal, I make manifest
filevw I love, I like
yhlafavw I touch
17.2 Contraction of Verbs

We are familiar with the process of contraction in English. It occurs
when two elements are combined into a shortened form (can notcant;
will notwont; it isits, etc.). In Greek there is an important class of
-w conjugation verbs, whose stems end in a short vowel, that is, a, o, or
e. These vowels contract with the connecting vowel o or e in verb forms
built on the present stem to form a single long vowel or diphthong. Not
surprisingly, these verbs are called contract verbs. Example: file + o
+ men becomes filou`men. Contract verbs appear in the vocabulary lists
of this text, and in lexicons, in their uncontracted forms. However, the
uncontracted forms do not occur in the New Testament.
17.3 Rules of Contraction

Unlike in English, contraction occurs in Greek verbs according to strict
rules, as follows:
1) Vowel plus vowel
a) Two like vowels form the common long vowel (a + a = h).

Exceptions: e + e = ei and o + o = ou.
b) An o-type vowel (o or w) prevails over other vowels and

results in w (o + a = w; e + w = w; a + w = w).
Exceptions: e + o = ou and o + e = ou.
c) When neither vowel is an o-type, the vowel which comes

first prevails in its long form:
(e + a = h; a + e = a; h + a = h).
2) Vowel plus diphthong
a) The vowel on the end of the stem disappears when the diph-
thong begins with the same vowel (e + ei = ei; o + ou = ou).
b) When the vowel on the end of the stem comes before a diph-
thong that begins with a different vowel, it contracts with
Contract Verbs 121
the first vowel of the diphthong and the second vowel of the
diphthong disappears, except for i, which becomes subscript
(a + ei = a/; a + ou = w; e + ou = ou).
Exceptions: o + ei = oi; o + h/ = oi; e + oi = oi.
Please do not attempt to memorize these rules. They are included here
for reference purposes only. The following chart may be helpful in this
regard:
Contraction Chart
Ending: e h ei h/ o w ou oi
Stem a a a a/ a/ w w w w/
Vowel e ei h ei h/ ou w ou oi
o ou w oi oi ou w ou oi
17.4 Rules of Accent for Contract Verbs

It is not necessary to memorize the following rules of accent for contract
verbs. Simply be aware of them:
1) If either the final stem vowel or the connecting vowel was

accented before contraction the contracted form will be ac-
cented.
2) If the accent fell on the first of the two vowels in the

uncontracted form, a circumflex will be placed over the con-
tracted form.
Example: dhlovwdhlw`.
3) If the accent appeared on the second vowel of the uncontracted

form, the contracted form will have an acute.
Example: dhloovmeqadhlouvmeqa.
17.5 Representative Paradigms of Contract Verbs

Contraction takes place only in the present and imperfect tenses, as in
the following examples:

timavw
timav + w = timw` timav + omen = timw`men
timav + ei~ = tima`/~ timav + ete = tima`te
timav + ei = tima/` timav + ousi(n) = timw`si(n)
filevw
filev + w = filw` filev + omen = filou`men
filev + ei~ = filei`~ filev + ete = filei`te
filev + ei = filei` filev + ousi(n) = filou`si(n)
dhlovw
dhlov + w = dhlw` dhlov + omen = dhlou`men
dhlov + ei~ = dhloi`~ dhlov + ete = dhlou`te
dhlov + ei = dhloi` dhlov + ousi(n) = dhlou`si(n)
Present Middle/Passive Indicative

timavw
timav + omai = timw`mai tima + ovmeqa = timwvmeqa
timav + h/ = tima`/ timav + esqe = tima`sqe
timav + etai = tima`tai timav = ontai = timw`ntai
filevw
filev + omai = filou`mai file + ovmeqa = filouvmeqa
filev + h/ = filh`/ filev + esqe = filei`sqe
filev + etai = filei`tai filev + ontai = filou`ntai
dhlovw
dhlov + omai = dhlou`mai dhlo + ovmeqa = dhlouvmeqa
dhlo + h/ = dhloi` dhlov + esqe = dhlou`sqe
dhlov + etai = dhlou`tai dhlov + ovtai = dhlou`ntai
Contract Verbs 123
Imperfect Active Indicative

timavw
ejtivma + on = ejtivmwn ejtimav + omen = ejtimw`men
ejtivma + e~ = ejtivma~ ejtimav + ete = ejtima`te
ejtivma + e = ejtivma ejtivma + on = ejtivmwn
filevw
ejfivle + on = ejfivloun ejfilev + omen = ejfilou`men
ejfivle + e~ = ejfivlei~ ejfilev + ete = ejfilei`te
ejfivle + e = ejfivlei ejfivle + on = ejfivloun
dhlovw
ejdhvlo + on = ejdhvloun ejdhlov + omen = ejdhlou`men
ejdhvlo + e~ = ejdhvlou~ ejdhlov + ete = ejdhlou`te
ejdhvlo + e = ejdhvlou ejdhvlo + on = ejdhvloun
Imperfect Middle/Passive Indicative

timavw
ejtima + ovmhn = ejtimwvmhn ejtima + ovmeqa = ejtimwvmeqa
ejtimav + ou = ejtimw` ejtimav + esqe = ejtima`sqe
ejtimav + eto = ejtima`to ejtimav + onto = ejtimw`nto
filevw
ejfile + ovmhn = ejfilouvmhn ejfile + omeqa = ejfilouvmeqa
ejfilev + ou = ejfilou` ejfilev + esqe = ejfilei`sqe
ejfilev + eto = ejfilei`to ejfilev + onto = ejfilou`nto
dhlovw
ejdhlo + ovmhn = ejdhlouvmhn ejdhlo + omeqa = ejdhlouvmeqa
ejdhlov + ou = ejdhlou` ejdhlov + esqe = ejdhlou`sqe
ejdhlov + eto = ejdhlou`to ejdhlov + onto = ejdhlou`nto
In all other tenses contraction does not take place because tense sign
consonants separate the vowels (s in the future and aorist, k in the per-
fect). In these tenses the contract vowel usually lengthens before the
tense sign consonant. Examples: threvwthrhvsw; staurovwstaurw`sw,
etc. An exception to this rule is kalevw, which retains e before the s in

both the future and aorist active (kalevsw, ejkavlesa).
17.6 Liquid Verbs

Liquid verbs are those verbs whose stems end in a liquid consonant: l,
m, n, r. These verbs form their future active and middle according to the
present tense pattern of filevw-type contract verbs. For example, the
future active indicative first person singular of mevnw is not mevnsw, but
menw`. Note that the only difference in form between the present active
indicative first person singular and the future active indicative first per-
son singular of these verbs is the type and placement of the accent. The
future active indicative forms of mevnw are: menw`, menei`~, menei`,
menou`men, menei`te, menou`si.
These verbs also form the aorist irregularly. No s is added to the
stem and the spelling of the stem is sometimes changed before first aorist
endings are added. The verb bavllw uses second aorist endings. Some
liquid verbs that appear in the New Testament are:
Present Future Aorist

ai[rw ajrw` h\ra
ajpokteivnw ajpoktenw` ajpevkteina
ajpostevllw ajpostelw` ajpevsteila
bavllw balw` e[balon
ejgeivrw ejgerw` h[geira
mevnw menw` e[meina
The future stem of the verb levgw is ejr- : ejrw`, ejrei`~, ejrei`, ejrou`men,
ejrei`te, ejrou`si.
17.7 The Irregular Verb zavw

The verb zavw is slightly irregular and is conjugated as follows:
Contract Verbs 125
Present Active Indicative Imperfect Active Indicative

zw` zw`men e[zwn ejzw`men
zh`~ zh`te e[zh~ ejzh`te
zh`/ zw`sin(n) e[zh e[zwn

Mt. 1:21 Rom. 1:8
Jn. 5:18 Phil. 3:18
Jn. 21:15-17
17.9 Exercises
1. tau`ta dhlwvsw tw`/ patri; tou` telwvnou.
2. oJ ajpovstolo~ ejlavlhsen parabolh;n toi`~ grammateu`si kai; toi`~

iJereu`sin.
3. marturou`men o{ti oJ qeo;~ ajgapa`/ hJma`~.
4. oiJ maqhtai; ejqewvrhsan ta; ajgaqa; e[rga tou` Cristou`.
5. ejlavloun tou;~ lovgou~ th`~ ajlhvqeia~.
6. oJ kuvrio~ eujlovghse ta; tevkna para; th`/ qavlassa/.
7. oJ jIhsou`~ ejfanevrwse th;n ajgavphn tou` qeou` uJpe;r tw`n o[clwn.
8. oJ qeo;~ hjgavphsen aJmartwlou;~ kai; ajpevsteile to;n uiJo;n aujtou`

eij~ to;n kovsmon.
9. oiJ ponhroi; a[vnqrwpoi oujk zhtou`si to;n kuvrion o{ti peripatou`sin

ejn tai`~ aJmartivai~ aujtw`n.
10. oJrw` th;n dovxan tou` Cristou`.
11. aiJ ponhrai; kaka; ejpoivoun.
12. parakalei` oJ path;r tou;~ uiJou;~ aujtou`.
13. ejzw`men me;n ejn tw/` kovsmw/, nu`n de; zw`men ejn th`/ povlei tou` qeou`.
14. aiJ qugavtre~ timwvsi th;n matevra aujtw`n;
15. ta; tevkna e[meine pro; th`~ ejkklhsiva~.

Chapter 18
The Infinitive
18.1 Vocabulary
ajntivcristo~, oJ antichrist, Antichrist
ajrnevomai I deny
a[rcomai I begin (middle voice of ajrcw, see Chapter.
10), followed by an infinitive
gh`, hJ earth, land, ground
dei` it is necessary (impersonal verb; takes the
accusative and infinitive)
duvnamai (1) I am able, I can
(takes a complementary infinitive)
ei\nai to be (infinitive of eijmiv)
e[xesti(n) it is lawful (impersonal verb;
takes the dative and the infinitive
ejpaggevllomai I promise
qeavomai I see, I notice
kleivw I shut, I close
mevllw I am about to (takes infinitive)
metabaivnw I leave, I move
oi\da (2) I know
(1) The verb duvnamai takes a as its connecting vowel throughout: duvnamai,
duvnh/, duvnatai, dunavmeqa, duvnasqe, duvnantai
(2) The verb oi\da is found only in the perfect and pluperfect tenses, which
are used with the meaning of the present and imperfect tenses, respectively. See
18.7, below.
oJmologevw I confess
privn before (adv.)
splavgcnon, tov heart, affection
(in pl., literally: innards, bowels, guts);
only in plural in New Testament
sfavzw I slay, I murder
tuflov~, -hv, -ovn blind
cavrin for the sake of, by reason of
(adv., used as a preposition with the genitive)
cri`sma, crivsmato~, tov annointing
yeu`do~, yeuvdou~, tov lie
w{ste so, that, therefore (conj.)
18.2 The Infinitive

A verb form that is used as a noun, adjective, or adverb is called a
verbal. Although some grammarians classify the infinitive as a mood
of the verb, it is best described as a verbal noun. The word infinitive
comes from a Latin word meaning not limited. So far we have studied
finite verbs, that is, those verbs that are limited by person and number.
The infinitive is an indeclinable verbal noun that is not limited by person
or number. As a verbal noun, the infinitive has qualities of both the verb
and the noun. For example, it has the verbal qualities of tense and voice
and it can take a direct or indirect object. The infinitive can also function
in any way that the noun does: subject, direct object, etc. The infinitive
was originally inflected as a noun but the inflection was lost during the
development of the Greek language. Although infinitives do not, strictly
speaking, have gender, they often appear with the neuter article. In En-
glish, the word to is usually placed before a verb to form an infinitive
(I want to learn Greek). The infinitive without to is the lexical or
dictionary form of the English verb.
18.3 Forms of the Infinitive

The Greek infinitive occurs in the present, future, aorist, and perfect
tenses. Because the future infinitive appears only five times in the New
Testament, it need not concern us here.
The Infinitive 129
Infinitives of luvw
Active Voice
Present luvein to be loosing
Aorist lu`sai to loose
Perfect lelukevnai to have loosed
Middle Voice
Present luvesqai to be loosing (for) oneself
Aorist luvsasqai to loose (for) oneself
Perfect leluvsqai to have loosed (for) oneself
Passive Voice
Present luvesqai to be being loosed
Aorist luqh`nai to be loosed
Perfect leluvsqai to have been loosed
Second Aorist Infinitive of leivpw

Active lipei`n to leave
Middle lipevsqai to leave (for) oneself
Passive liph`nai to be left
Infinitives of Contract Verbs

Present Active Infinitive
filevwfilei`n timavwtima`n dhlovwdhlou`n
Present Middle/Passive Infinitive

Filevwfilei`sqai timavwtima`sqai dhlovwdhou`sqai
18.4 Uses of the Infinitive

Tense in the infinitive has to do with kind of action, rather than time of
action. Time in the infinitive is relative to the time of the main verb. The
kinds of action in the infinitive are the same as those we learned for the
tenses: progressive, summary, and perfected. Although infinitives do
not have grammatical subjects, they do have logical subjects, i.e., what
becomes the subject in the English translation. This subject is usually
in the accusative case and is often called the accusative of general refer-
ence. Example: pro; tou` de; ejlqei`n to;n ajpovstolon . . . (Before the
apostle came . . .). Note this usage in the sections to follow.
There are two broad categories of uses of the Greek infinitive: ad-
verbial and substantival. In the adverbial use, the verbal qualities of the
infinitive are predominant:
1) The Complementary Infinitive
The infinitive may complete the meaning of a verb. Example: mevllw

luvein to;n a[nqrwponI am about to loose the man.
2) The Infinitive of Purpose
The infinitive may indicate the purpose of the main verb. Purpose may
be expressed by the infinitive alone, the infinitive with tou`, and the
infinitive with eij~ tov or pro;~ tov. Examples: h\lqomen proskunhvsai
tw`/ kuvriw/We came to worship the Lord; ejzhvtoun tou` luvsai ta;
e[rga aujtou`They were seeking to destroy his works. e[pemya aujto;n
eij~ to; akouvein to;n didavskalonI sent him to listen to the teacher.
3) The Infinitive of Result
The infinitive is most frequently used with the conjunction w{ste to show
result. Example: e[pemya aujto;n w{ste aujto;n th;n ginwvskein ajlhvqeian
I sent him so that (with the result that) he is knowing the truth. Note
that in this usage the logical subject of the infinitive is in the accusa-
tive case. The infinitive is less commonly used with tou` and eij~ tov to
indicate result. When tou` or eij~ tov plus the infinitive are encountered,
context must determine whether purpose or result is intended and, at
times, it is nearly impossible to distinguish between them (see Rom.
11:10 in the Verses for Application section, below).
The Infinitive 131
4) The Infinitive of Time (Temporal Infinitives)
In this use of the infinitive, time is relative to the time of the main verb,
i. e., it shows WHEN the action of the main verb takes place.
a) Antecedent time (the action of the main verb takes place

before the action of the infinitive) is expressed by privn, pri;n
h[, or pro; tou` and the infinitive. Example: pro; tou` aujto;n
ajpeqanei`n e[bleye to;n kuvrion (Before he died he saw the
Lord).
b) Contemporaneous time (the action of the main verb takes

place at the same time as the action of the infinitive) is ex-
pressed by ejn tw`/ and the infinitive. Example: ejn tw`/ speivrein
aujtovn e[bleye to;n kuvrion (While he was sowing he saw
the Lord).
c) Subsequent time (the action of the main verb takes place

after the action of the infinitive) is expressed by meta; tov
and the infinitive. Example: meta; to; ejgerqh`nai aujtovn
e[bleye to;n kuvrion (After he had been raised he saw the
Lord).
5) Infinitive of Cause
The idea of cause may be expressed with dia; tov and the infinitive.
Example: dia; to; aujto;n ginwvskein hJma`~ (Because he knows us).
Again note that the logical subject of the infinitive is in the accusative
case. In cases in which there is also a direct object, as in this example,
context must distinguish the subject of the infinitive from the direct
object.
In the substantival use of the infinitive the noun qualities of the infinitive
predominate:
1) The Infinitive as Subject
The infinitive may function as the subject of a finite verb. Example:

kalovn ejsti to; manqavnein (To learn is good.)
2) The Infinitive as Direct Object
The infinitive may function as the direct object of a finite verb. Ex-
ample: a[rcetai didavskein th;n ajlhvqeian (He is beginning to teach
the truth).
Other uses of the infinitive are better left for intermediate and advanced
study.
18.5 Infinitives With Impersonal Verbs

Two impersonal verbs, dei` and e[xesti, are frequently used with the
infinitive. These verbs are impersonal in the sense that they do not have
personal endings. The subject of an impersonal verb is an infinitive rather
than a person. dei` is used with the accusative case and e[xesti is used
with the dative case. Examples: h|ma~ dei` ajpevrcesqai (It is necessary
for us to leave) and uJmi`n e[xestin tou`to labei`n (It is lawful for you
to receive this.)
18.6 Indirect Speech

Consider the following two sentences:
1) The man said, I know.
2) The man said that he knew.
These sentences say essentially the same thing but the first sentence is a
direct quotation of what the man said (direct speech), whereas the sec-
ond reports what the man said (indirect speech). Indirect speech may be
expressed in two ways in Greek. The first is with the subordinating
conjunction o{ti, which was introduced in Chapter 8. Example: oJ
a[nqrwpo~ ei\pon o{ti ginwvskei. This sentence is translated into English
as The man said that he knew, but note that in the Greek construction
the dependent clause usually remains in the tense that would have been
used in direct speech. When translating, be sure to put the verb in the
proper English tense. Indirect speech may also be expressed in Greek by
The Infinitive 133
using an infinitive in the dependent clause. Example: oJ dou`lo~ ei\pon

to;n profhvthn ginwvskein aujtovn (The servant said that he knew the
prophet).
18.7 Conjugation of oi\da

The verb oi\da is found in the perfect and pluperfect tenses only. The
perfect form is translated with the meaning of the present tense and the
pluperfect is translated with the meaning of the imperfect tense. oi\da is
conjugated as follows:
Singular Plural
Perfect Pluperfect Perfect Pluperfect
oi\da h[`dein oi[damen h[deimen
oi\da~ h[`dei~ oi[date h[deite
oi\de(n) h[`dei oi[dasi(n) h[deisan
Infinitive: eijdevnai
18.8 Parsing Infinitives

Parse infinitives as follows: lu`saiaorist active infinitive from luvw

Mt. 20:28 Lk. 22:15 Phil. 1:21
Lk. 2:4 Jn. 21:3 1 Jn. 3:9
Lk. 8:5 Rom. 11:10
18.9 Exercises
1. a[rch/ manqavnein tou;~ lovgou~ tou` maqhtou`.
2. mevllomen to;n kuvrion blevyai;
3. oJ ponhro;~ telwvnh~ wJmolovghse ta;~ aJmartiva~ aujtou`.
4. oJ ajntivcristo~ e[sfaxe tou;~ aJgivou~ ejn tai`~ hJmevrai~ tai`~

e[scatai~.
5. hJ pisth; ejlhvluqen eij~ to; doxavzein to;n qeo;n ejn th`/ ejkklhsiva/.
6. moi e[xestin ei\nai ejn tou`tw/ tw`/ tovpw/.
7. uJma`~ dei` ajpevrcesqai.
8. oJ pathvr ajpevsteile to;n uiJo;n aujtou` eij~ to;n kovsmon tou` sw`sai
tou;~ aJmartwlouv~.
9. oJ Ij hsou`~ h[rxato poiei`n kai; didavskein.
10. ejqewvroun to;n ajpovstolon ejn tw`/ mevnein ejn tw`/ iJerw`/ aujtovn.
11. oi[date th;n ajlhvqeian th`~ basileiva~ tou` qeou`;
12. eijshvlqomen eij~ to; iJero;n pri;n ajpevrcesqai to;n iJereva.
13. e[pemya to;n dou`lovn mou w{ste aujto;n labei`n to;n kalo;n karpovn.
14. hJ mhvthr ei\pon th;n qugavtera aujth`~ para; tw`/ oi[kw/ ei\nai.
15. oJ maqhth;~ duvnatai qerapeuvsai to;n tuflovn.

Chapter 19
Introduction to Participles:
Present Participles
19.1 Vocabulary
ajdikiva, hJ unrighteousness, unrighteous act
ajsthvr, ajstevro~, oJ star
blasfhmevw I blaspheme, I speak against, I slander
dexiov~, -av, -ovn right (opposite of left)
ejn th`/ dexia`/ at the right (hand)
diavbolo~, oJ devil
e{w~ until, while
(conj., used as preposition with the genitive)
iJlasmov~, oJ propitiation; the means by which sins are forgiven
mavrtu~, mavrturo~, oJ witness
ojfeivlw I owe, I ought, I am obligated
(often followed by an infinitive)
ojfqalmov~, oJ eye
paravklhto~, oJ advocate
pw`~ how? (adv.)
skavndalon, tov stumbling block, cause for stumbling
taravssw I disturb, I trouble, I stir up
faivnw I shine, I cause to shine
fovbo~, oJ fear
fw`~, fwtov~, tov light
ceivr, ceirov~, hJ hand
yeuvdomai I lie, I deceive
yeuvsth~, oJ liar
19.2 Participles
Participles are verbal adjectives. As such, they have characteristics of
both verbs and adjectives. Like verbs, participles have tense and voice
and they may take an object. They may also take adverbial modifiers or
be adverbial modifiers themselves. Like adjectives, participles are de-
clined and must agree in case, gender, and number with the noun or
other substantive that they modify, whether the substantive is expressed
or implied. They also may function substantivally as subject, direct ob-
ject, indirect object, etc.
In English there are two participlespresent and pastand they are
easy to recognize. The present participle ends in -ing (reading, writ-
ing, running) and the past participle usually ends in -ed (walked,
talked, BUT written). Participles are used in three ways in English.
They combine with helping verbs to express various tense ideas (He is
teaching Greek; I have talked with him). They may also be used as
adjectives (Mr. Johnson is an outstanding teacher; This article is
well written). A third use of English participles is in participial phrases
(While eating lunch, he studied his Greek assignment; Overcome
with grief, the mother wept for her son). As we will see, Greek parti-
ciples are used much as they are in English, especially as in the second
and third examples above. Greek verbs also combine with helping verbs
to express tense ideas, but this is less common than in English. This
process is called periphrasis and will be presented later in the course.
19.3 Formation of the Present Active Participle

Masculine and neuter present active participles take third declension
endings, and feminine present active participles follow the dovxa pattern
of first declension feminine nouns.
Present Active Participle of luvw

Singular
N luvwn luvousa luòn
GA luvonto~ luouvsh~ luvonto~
DLI luvonti luouvsh/ luvonti
AC luvonta luvousan luòn
Introduction to Participles: Present Participles 137
Plural
N luvonte~ luvousai luvonta
GA luovntwn luousw`n luovntwn
DLI luvousi(n) luouvsai~ luvousi(n)
AC luvonta~ luouvsa~ luvonta
1) Present participles are formed on the present stem of the verb.
2) The stem of masculine and neuter participles is the genitive singular

form, minus the ending
3) Loosing is a general translation of these active forms. Exact trans-

lations are determined by context.
4) The forms of the future participle are the same as those of the present
participle except that s is added to the stem, as in the future tense
(luvswn, luvsonto~, etc.).
5) Accent on participles is not recessive but, where possible, remains

on the same syllable as the nominative singular form.
6) Contract verbs form their present active participles regularly, ac-

cording to the principles of contraction, as follows:

filevw: filw`n filou`sa filou`n
filou`nto~ filouvsh~ filou`nto~
etc. etc. etc.
timavw: timw`n timw`sa timw`n

timw`nto~ timwvsh~ timw`nto~
etc. etc. etc.
dhlovw: dhlw`n dhlou`sa dhlou`n

dhlou`nto~ dhlouvsh~ dhlou`nto~
etc. etc. etc.
7) The participial forms of oi\da are: eijdwv~, eijdovto~, etc.

eijduià, eijduià~, etc.
eijdov~, eijdovto~, etc.
19.4 Present Participle of eijmiv

The forms of the present participle of eijmiv are identical to the endings of
the present active participle.
Singular
N w[n ou\sa o[n
GA o[nto~ ou[sh~ o[nto~
DLI o[nti ou[sh/ o[nti
AC o[nta ou\san o[n
Plural
N o[nte~ ou\sai o[nta
GA o[ntwn oujsw`n o[ntwn
DLI ou\si(n) ou[sai~ ou\si(n)
AC o[nta~ ou[sa~ o[nta
Being is a general translation of the present participle of eijmiv. More

exact translations must be determined by context.
19.5 Formation of the Present Middle/Passive

Participle
Present middle and passive participles use the same forms but their func-
tions are different. Masculine and neuter forms follow the second de-
clension, and feminine forms follow the grafhv pattern of first declen-
sion feminine nouns.
Present Middle/Passive Participle of luvw

Singular
N luovmeno~ luomevnh luovmenon
GA luomevnou luomevnh~ luomevnou
DLI luomevnw/ luomevnh/ luomevnw/
AC luovmenon luomevnhn luovmenon
Plural
N luovmenoi luovmenai luovmena
GA luomevnwn luomevnwn luomevnwn
DLI luomevnoi~ luomevnai~ luomevnoi~
AC luomevnou~ luomevna~ luovmena
1) Loosing oneself/loosing for oneself are general translations of the

middle forms. Being loosed is a general translation of the passive
forms. More exact translations must be determined by context.
2) Contract verbs form their middle/passive participles regularly, ac-

cording to the rules of contraction, as follows:
filevw: filouvmeno~, filoumevnh, filouvmenon
timavw: timwvmeno~, timwmevnh, timwvmenon
dhlovw: dhlouvmeno~, dhloumevnh, dhlouvmenon
19.6 Functions of the Greek Participle

Four Greek tenses have participles: present, future, aorist, and perfect.
The future participle is rare and will not be treated here. Thus we have
three basic forms of the Greek participle, i.e., one for each verbal as-
pect, or kind of action. The present participle expresses progressive ac-
tion, the aorist participle expresses summary action, and the perfect par-
ticiple expresses perfected action. Time of action in participles is relative
to the time of the main verb of a sentence or clause. The present parti-
ciple shows action that is simultaneous, or at the same time, as the action
of the main verb. The aorist and perfect participles indicate action that is
antecedent to, or comes before, the action of the main verb. The rarely
encountered future participle expresses action that is subsequent to, or
comes after, the action of the main verb. The relationship of the parti-
ciple to the main verb remains the same regardless of the tense of the
main verb. Examples: levgwn tau`ta blevpw to;n dou`lon (While saying
these things I see the servant); levgwn tau`ta e[bleya to;n dou`lon (While
I was saying these things I saw the servant); levgwn tau`ta blevyw to;n
dou`lon (When saying these things I will see the servant). In each of
the three examples the action of the participle is taking place at the same
time as the action of the main verb. Note that since the Greek participle
has no imperfect form, the present participle is used in its place with past
tense verbs.
Every Greek participle is both verbal and adjectival in nature, but in
its specific use a participle emphasizes either its verbal or its adjectival
element, as follows:
1) Adverbial Use of the Participle

When used adverbially, a participles verbal aspect is prominent. A par-
ticiple may be used adverbially to show in what circumstances the action
of the main verb occurs. It may indicate means, manner, cause, pur-
pose, etc. In its most common usage, the Greek participle indicates when
the action of the main verb occurs. This is called the temporal use of the
participle. Adverbial participles are commonly translated by means of a
dependent clause beginning with a word like while, when, hav-
ing, after, because, etc. Example: levgwn tau`ta oJ a[nqrwpo~
blevpei to;n kuvrion (While saying these things, the man sees the Lord).
Adverbial participles normally appear in the nominative case in order to
agree with the subject of the main verb, but they may be encountered in
other cases as well. Example: e[bleya to;n a[nqrwpon levgonta tau`ta
(I saw the man while he was saying these things). When used adverbi-
ally the participle never has the article.
2) Adjectival Use of the Participle

When used adjectivally, the Greek participle agrees with the noun it
modifies in case, gender, and number. Like an adjective, a participle
may be used attributively, predicatively, or substantivally.
a) Attributive participles
In this usage the participle functions like an attributive adjective. If

an article appears in the construction it must precede the participle. It
may or may not precede the noun. The best way to translate an attribu-
tive participle is with a relative clause. Example: oJ a[nqrwpo~ oJ gravfwn
tau`ta (The man who writes/is writing these things).
b) Predicate participles
In this usage the participle functions like a predicate adjective, i.e.,

it makes an assertion about a noun or other substantive. A linking verb,
either stated or implied, appears in this construction. Example: zw`n oJ
lovgo~ tou` qeou` (The word of God is living . . .Heb. 4:12). A
predicate participle never has the article. Although the attributive parti-
ciple is common, the predicate participle occurs rarely in the New Tes-
tament.
c) Substantival participles
Participles may also be used substantivally, to take the place of a

noun or other substantive. They may function in any way that a noun
functions: as subject, direct object, etc. Examples: oJ luvwn to;n dou`lon
oujk ginwvskei th;n ahlhvqeian tou` eujaggevliou (The one loosing/who
is loosing OR the man loosing/the man who looses the bondservant does
not know the truth of the gospel); blevpw th;n levgousan tau`ta (I see
the woman who is saying/who says these things).
Keep in mind that if a participle is preceded by the article, it can

only be attributive or substantival. If there is no article in the construc-
tion, context must determine which use of the participle is in view. This
parallels adjectival usage (see Chapter 5).
19.7 Parsing Participles

A Greek participle should be parsed as follows: oJ levgwnpresent, ac-
tive, participle, nominative, masculine, singular from levgw. It is also a
good practice to tell how the participle is being used: adverbially,
attributively, or substantivally. As can be seen from the above discus-

sion, participles are used in Greek much as they are used in English but
they are more common in Greek and it is imperative that you master
them if you wish to make progress in reading the Greek New Testament.

Mt. 24:30 Jn. 6:50
Mk. 1:14 Jn. 8:47
Jn. 1:29 Rev. 1:3
19.9 Exercises
1. levgwn tau`ta oJ a[nqrwpo~ blevpei to;n iJereva.
2. oJ dou`lo~ oJ luovmeno~ uJpo; tou` ponhrou` oi\de th;n ajlhvqeian.
3. oiJ ajpovstoloi ei\don ta;~ cei`ra~ tou` kuvriou ejn toi`~ ojfqalmoi`~
aujtw`n meta; th;n ajnavstasin.
4. h\lqen oJ yeuvsth~ taravsswn tou;~ o[clou~.
5. blevpomen th;n levgousan tau`ta.
6. ojfeivlousin oiJ aJgioi poiei`n ta;~ ajdikiva~;
7. oiJ pisteuvonte~ eij~ to;n qeo;n oujk e[cousi to;n fovbon tou` qavnatou.
8. ginwvskomen tou;~ swzovmenou~.
9. oJ jIhsou`~ e[rcetai lalw`n parabolhvn.
10. oJra`te tou;~ divkaiou~ ajnqrwvpou~ tou;~ o[nta~ ejn tw`/ fwtiv;
11. oJ paravklhto~ oJ ejrcovmenov~ ejstin to; pneuvma to; a{gion.
12. to; eujaggevliovn ejsti skavndalon toi`~ a[pistoi~.
13. oJ diavbolo~ ejblasfhvmei to;n lovgon tou` qeou`.
14. oJ Cristo;~ aujtov~ ejstin oJ iJlasmo;~ peri; tw`n aJmartiw`n hJmw`n.
15. oJ ajkouvwn to;n lovgon mou kai; pisteuvwn eij~ aujto;n swqhvsetai.
(page 144 blank)
Chapter 20
Aorist Participles
20.1 Vocabulary
ajpoluvw I release, I set free
gewrgov~, oJ farmer
diavkono~, oJ, hJ servant, minister, deacon (masculine and feminine)
ejnwvpion before, in the presence of (adv., used as preposition
with the genitive)
ejrwtavw I ask, I request
ijdwvn, -ou`sa, -ovn having seen (second aorist active participle of oJravw)
kavqhmai I sit down
logivzomai I account, I reckon
mhv not (negative particle; used with moods other than
the indicative and with participles and infinitives)
mhdev and not, nor, not even (negative particle)
mhde; . . . mhdev neither . . . nor
mhkevti no longer (adv.)
misqov~, oJ wages
mwrov~, -av, -ovn foolish
o[ro~, o[rou~, tov mountain
palaiov~, -av, -ovn old (never used of persons)
plouvsio~, -a, -on rich
provswpon, tov face
ptwcov~, -hv, -ovn poor
shmeiòn, tov sign
skovto~, skovtou~, tov darkness
stavcu~, stavcuo~, oJ ear of grain, wheat
swthriva, hJ salvation
20.2 Forms of the First Aorist Active and Middle

Participle
Not surprisingly, the aorist participle is built on the aorist stem, but
there is no augment (see section 20.6). The aorist passive participle forms
are entirely different from those of the middle and will be treated in
sections 20.4 and 20.5, below. The aorist active participle, like the present
active participle, follows third declension endings in the masculine and
neuter, and follows the dovxa pattern of first declension nouns in the
feminine. Masculine and neuter forms of the aorist middle particple fol-
low the second declension, and feminine forms follow the grafhv pat-
tern of first declension feminine nouns. The aorist active suffix sa ap-
pears in all forms of the first aorist active and middle participle.
First Aorist Active Participle of luvw

Singular
N luvsa~ luvsasa lu`san
GA luvsanto~ lusavsh~ luvsanto~
DLI luvsanti lusavsh/ luvsanti
AC luvsanta luvsasan lu`san
Plural
N luvsante~ luvsasai luvsanta
GA lusavntwn lusasw`n lusavntwn
DLI luvsasi(n) lusavsai~ luvsasi(n)
AC luvsanta~ lusavsa~ luvsanta
Having loosed is a general translation of the aorist active participle.

More exact translations are determined by context.
Aorist Participles 147
First Aorist Middle Participle of luvw

Singular
N lusavmeno~ lusamevnh lusavmenon
GA lusamevnou lusamevnh~ lusamevnou
DLI lusamevnw/ lusamevnh/ lusamevnw/
AC lusavmenon lusamevna~ lusavmenon
Plural
N lusavmenoi lusavmenai lusavmena
GA lusamevnwn lusamevnwn lusamevnwn
DLI lusamevnoi~ lusamevnai~ lusamevnoi~
AC lusamevnou~ lusamevna~ lusavmena
Having loosed oneself/having loosed for oneself are general transla-

tions of the aorist middle participle. More exact translations are deter-
mined by context.
20.3 Forms of the Second Aorist Active and

Middle Participle
The second aorist active and middle participles use the second aorist
stem and take the same endings as the present active participle.
Second Aorist Active Participle of leivpw

Singular
N lipwvn lipou`sa lipovn
GA lipovnto~ lipouvsh~ lipovnto~
DLI lipovnti lipouvsh/ lipovnti
AC lipovnta lipou`san lipovn
Plural
N lipovnte~ lipou`sai lipovnta
GA lipovntwn lipousw`n lipovntwn
DLI lipou`si(n) lipouvsai~ lipou`si(n)
AC lipovnta~ lipouvsa~ lipovnta
Second Aorist Middle Participle of leivpw

Singular
N lipovmeno~ lipomevnh lipovmenon
GA lipomevnou lipomevnh~ lipomevnou
DLI lipomevnw/ lipomevnh/ lipomevnw/
AC lipovmenon lipomevnhn lipovmenon
Plural
N lipovmenoi lipovmenai lipovmena
GA lipomevnwn lipomevnwn lipomevnwn
DLI lipomevnoi~ lipomevnai~ lipomevnoi~
AC lipomevnou~ lipomevna~ lipovmena
20.4 Forms of the First Aorist Passive Participle

The first aorist passive participle is built on the first aorist passive stem,
but there is no augment (see section 20.6). The masculine and neuter
forms follow the third declension pattern of endings, and the feminine
forms follow the dovxa pattern of first declension nouns. The first aorist
passive suffix qh changes to qe (or qei) in the participial forms.
First Aorist Passive Participle of luvw

Singular
N luqeiv~ luqei`sa luqevn
GA luqevnto~ luqeivsh~ luqevnto~
DLI luqevnti luqeivsh/ luqevnti
AC luqevnta luqei`san luqevn
Plural
N luqevnte~ luqei`sai luqevnta
GA leqevntwn luqeisw`n luqevntwn
DLI luqei`si(n) luqeivsai~ luqei`si(n)
AC luqevnta~ luqeivsa~ luqevnta
Having been loosed is a general translation of the aorist passive parti-

ciple. More exact translations are determined by context.
20.5 Forms of the Second Aorist Passive Participle

The second aorist passive participle is formed like its first aorist coun-
terpart, except that the q is omitted.
Second Aorist Passive Participle of gravfw

Singular
N grafeiv~ grafei`sa grafevn
GA grafevnto~ grafeivsh~ grafevnto~
DLI grafevnti grafeivsh/ grafevnti
AC grafevnta grafei`san grafevn
Plural
N grafevnte~ grafei`sai grafevnta
GA grafevntwn grafeisw`n grafevntwn
DLI grafei`si(n) grafeivsai~ grafei`si(n)
AC grafevnta~ grafeivsa~ grafevnta
20.6 Uses of the Aorist Participle

The kind of action in the aorist participle is summary action as with the
aorist tense of the verb. Since time is not fixed in participles, but is
relative to the time of the main verb, the aorist participle does not take
an augment. The time of action in an aorist participle is ordinarily ante-
cedent to, or prior to, the time of the main verb in the sentence or clause.
Examples: oJ a[nqrwpo~ oJ eijpw;n tau`ta ginwvskei th;n ajlhvqeian tou`
eujaggevliou (The man who said these things knows the truth of the
gospel). hJ eijpoùsa tau`ta eijsh`lqen eij~ th;n ejkklhsiva/ (The woman
who had said these things entered the church). When translating an
adverbial aorist participle it is suggested that you use words like when,
after, etc. It may be necessary to add some helping verbs or clauses in
English to capture the meaning of the Greek. Example: eijpw;n tau`ta oJ
kuvrio~ ejxh`lqen ejk tou` iJerou` (After he had said these things, the Lord
went out from the temple).

Mt. 16:17 Acts 16:6
Mk. 6:41 Acts 19:2
Jn. 3:21 Eph. 1:3
20.8 Exercises
1. eijpw;n tau`ta oJ profhvth~ blevpei to;n dou`lon.
2. oj a[vnqrwpo~ oJ ejxelqw;n ejk tou` oi[kou h\lqe pro;~ th;n qavlassan.
3. oiJ mh; ijdovnte~ to;n kuvrion oujk pisteuvousin eij~ aujtovn.
4. e[ti o[vnte~ ejn tw`/ iJerw`/ ejkhvrusson oiJ maqhtai; toi`~ o[cloi~.
5. oiJ didacqevnte~ uJpo; tou` kuvriouv eijsi pistoiv.
6. oiJ a[nqrwpoi oiJ ajkouvsante~ to;n eujaggevlion pisteuvousin eij~

to;n kuvrion.
7. toi`~ qerapeuqeivsin uJpo; tou` Cristou` ei[pete lovgou~ th`~ ejlpivdo~

kai; th`~ ajgavph~.
8. ou|toiv eijsin oiJ khruvxante~ th;;n basileivan tou` qeou` toi`~

plouvsioi~ kai; toi`~ ptwcoi`~.
9. ajkouvsante~ ta; legomevna uJpo; tou` maqhtou` tou` Cristou` tou`

uiJou` tou` qeou` ejpisteuvsan eij~ aujtovn.
10. maqovnte~ th;n ajlhvqeian tou` eujaggevliou, oiJ gewrgoi; ajpevlusan

tou`~ douvlou~ aujtw`n.
11. kaqarisqevnte~ ajpo; tw`n aJmartiw`n hJmw`n ejbaptivsqhmen.
12. au{th hJ swthriva hJ khrucqei`sa ejn tw`/ kovsmw/.
13. mh; pisteuvsa~ eij~ to;n Cristo;n, oJ mwro;~ ejmevne ejn tw`/ skovtei.
14. poihvsa~ shmeià ejnwvpion tw`n maqhtw`n, oJ jIhsou`~ ajnevbh eij~

to;n ourano;n kai; nu`n kavqhtai ejn th`/ dexia`/ tou` qeou`.
15. oiJ o[nte~ ejn th`/ ejkklhsiva/ parakalou`men tou`~ diwxavmenou~ dia;
to;n eujaggevlion.
(page 152 blank)
Chapter 21
Perfect Participles, Genitive

Absolute, Periphrastic Constructions
21.1 Vocabulary
basileuv~, basilevw~, oJ king
ejkei` there (adv.)
e[to~, e[tou~, tov year
kaqwv~ as, just as
kaqeuvdw I sleep, I am dead
katoikevw I inhabit, I dwell
keleuvw I command
kopiavw I work, I labor
kravzw I cry out
kruptov~, -hv, -ovn hidden, concealed, secret
kwfov~, -hv, -ovn deaf, mute
nomivzw I think, I suppose
o{moio~, -a, -on like, similar to (used with the dative)
plh`qo~, plhvqou~, tov crowd, people
provbaton, tov sheep
tevlo~, tevlou~, tov end
frovnimo~, -on prudent
fulavssw I guard, I keep
cronivzw I delay, I tarry
21.2 Forms of the Perfect Active Participle

The perfect active participle is built on the perfect active stem, the fourth
principal part of the Greek verb.
Perfect Active Participle of luvw

Singular
N lelukwv~ lelukuià lelukov~
GA lelukovto~ lelukuiva~ lelukovto~
DLI lelukovti lelukuiva/ lelukovti
AC lelukovta lelukuiàn lelukov~
Plural
N lelukovte~ lelukuiài lelukovta
GA lelukovtwn lelukuiw`n lelukovtwn
DLI lelukovsi(n) lelukuivai~ lelukovsi(n)
AC lelukovta~ lelukuiva~ lelukovta
1) Masculine and neuter perfect active participles take third declension

endings, and feminine perfect active participles follow the hJmevra
pattern of first declension feminine nouns.
2) The n is omitted before t in the masculine and neuter endings.
3) The ending in the masculine and neuter DLI plural is -osi.
4) Note the distinctive ui following the k throughout the feminine forms.
5) Second perfects do not have k: gevgrafagegrafwv~; ajkhvkoa

ajkhkowv~.
6) Having loosed is a general translation for the perfect active parti-

ciple. Context determines the exact translation.
Perfect Participles, Genitive Absolute, Periphrastic Constructions 155
21.3 Forms of the Perfect Middle/Passive

Participle
The perfect middle and passive participles are built on the perfect middle/
passive stem, the fifth principal part of the Greek verb. The forms for
the middle and passive are identical.
Perfect Middle/Passive Participle of luvw

Singular
N lelumevno~ lelumevnh lelumevnon
GA lelumevnou lelumevnh~ lelumevnou
DLI lelumevnw/ lelumevnh/ lelumevnw/
AC lelumevnon lelumevnhn lelumevnon
Plural
N lelumevnoi lelumevnai lelumevna
GA lelumevnwn lelumevnwn lelumevnwn
DLI lelumevnoi~ lelumevnai~ lelumevnoi~
AC lelumevnou~ lelumevna~ lelumevna
1) Note that as with all perfect tense forms the middle and passive
participles have no connecting vowel.
2) Having been loosed is a general translation of the perfect passive

participle and having loosed for oneself is a general translation for
the perfect middle participle. As always, context determines the ex-
act translation.
21.4 Uses of the Perfect Participle

The perfect participle carries the same significance as the perfect tense,
i.e., it emphasizes the existing result of a past action. The action itself
will be antecedent to, or prior to, the time of the leading verb, but the
state which results from that action will be contemporaneous with the
time of the leading verb. The perfect participle is often translated like
the aorist participle, but the intent is different. Example: lelukwv~ tou;~
douvlou~ oJ ponhro;~ e[bleye to;n kuvrion (Having loosed/after he had
loosed the servants, the evil man saw the Lord). The idea here is that
the servants remained in a loosed state at the time that the evil man saw
the Lord. When translating the attributive perfect participle the sense of
the perfect tense can be brought out by using the helping verb has or
had. Example: oJ ponhro;~ oJ lelukw;~ tou;~ douvlou~ blevpei to;n
kuvrion (The evil man who has/had loosed the servants is seeing the
Lord). Again, the idea here is that the servants remain in a loosed state
as the man is in the process of seeing the Lord.
21.5 The Genitive Absolute

A construction that is commonly found in the New Testament is the
genitive absolute, which modifies the main verb of a sentence or clause
adverbially. It consists of a participle without the article accompanied by
a noun or pronoun. Both substantive and participle are in the genitive
case. This construction is used when the subject of the leading verb is
different from the noun or pronoun which accompanies the participle. It
is called absolute because it is grammatically unconnected with the
rest of the sentence. The genitive absolute is always adverbial and is
often temporal. The use of the genitive absolute construction can be seen
by comparing the following two sentences:
1) eijpovnte~ tau`ta oiJ ponhroi; ajph`lqon (Having said these

things, the evil men went away). In this example, the sub-
ject of the sentence is directly connected with the participle
eijpovnte~, that is, the ones saying are also the ones go-
ing away. The participle is therefore in the nominative case
in order to agree with the subject.
2) levgonto~ tou` kuvriou tau`ta oiJ ponhroi; ajph`lqon (While

the Lord was saying these things, the evil men went away).
In this example there is no direct grammatical connection
between the participle levgonto~ and the subject of the sen-
tence, oiJ ponhroiv. The one saying and the ones going
are different people, so the genitive absolute construction is
used. To repeat, the genitive absolute is used when the noun
or pronoun associated with a participle is different from the

subject of the leading verb and has no direct grammatical
relationship with the rest of the sentence.
21.6 Periphrastic Constructions

As noted earlier, Greek does not normally use helping verbs (will, am,
be, was, etc.) to express verbal ideas, but on occasion a form of the verb
eijmiv (less often, givnomai and uJpavrcw. See Chapter 27) does combine
with an anarthrous participle (without the article) to express a single
verbal idea. This process is called periphrasis, which comes from the
Greek word meaning to express something in a roundabout way. English
must use this type of construction to express continuous action: He was
reading, I will be studying Greek, She is doing her homework,
etc. Although Greek normally expresses continuous action by simple
tense usage, the periphrastic construction is also used. Example: oJ kuvrio~
h\n didavskwn tou;~ o[clou~ (The Lord was teaching the crowds). Origi-
nally this usage emphasized the continuous force of a participle but by
the time of Koine Greek this emphasis was largely lost. Translate the
periphrastic construction as you would the regular tense idea. The parti-
ciple in a periphrastic construction occurs most often in the nominative
case and it usually follows the verb. The following types of periphrastic
constructions are possible:
Tense Periphrastic Construction

Present present tense of eijmiv plus present participle
(ejsti; luvwnHe is loosing)
Imperfect imperfect tense of eijmiv plus present participle

(h\n luvwnHe was loosing)
Future future tense of eijmiv plus present participle

(e[stai luvwnHe will be loosing)
Perfect present tense of eijmiv plus perfect participle

(ejsti; lelukw`~He has loosed)
Pluperfect imperfect tense of eijmiv plus perfect participle

(h\n lelukw`~He had loosed)
Note that middle and passive participles are also used in periphrastic
constructions. In fact, a perfect periphrastic is commonly used to ex-
press the perfect passive idea (see Eph. 2:8 in the Verses for Application
section). The periphrastic imperfect is the most common periphrastic
construction in the New Testament. See the verses for application and
the exercises for examples of periphrastic usage.

Mt. 7:29 Jn. 8:30
Lk. 9:35 Acts 1:8
Lk. 21:17 Eph. 2:8
21.8 Exercises
1. ta; gegrammevna ejn tw`/ biblivw/ ejstin ajgaqav.
2. oiJ bebaptismevnoi a[nqrwpoiv eijsin ejn th`/ ejkklhsiva/.
3. oiJ ejxelhqovte~ ejk tou` skovtou~ th`~ aJmartiva~ nu;n mevnousin ejn
tw`/ fwtiv.
4. oJ ÆIhsou`~ h\n cronivzwn ejn tw`/ iJerw`;
5. tau`ta ei\pen oJ kuvrio~ toi`~ pepisteukovsin eij~ aujtovn.
6. lalou`nto~ tau`ta tou` kuvriou ei\don ta; plhvqh th`n ajlhvqeian th`~
ajgavph~ tou` qeou`.
7. oiJ ajkhkoovte~ tau`ta ejmartuvroun peri; tou` kuvriou.
8. oiJ ajstevre~ e[sontai ejk tw`n oujranw`n pivptonte~;
9. eijpovnto~ tau`ta tou` maqhtou` oJ basileuv~ ejxh`lqen ejk th`~

ejkklhsiva~.
10. oJ gewrgov~ ejsti fulavsswn ta; provbata.
11. oiJ uiJoi; h\san ajnaginwvskonte~ ejn tw`/ oi[kw/ tou` profhvtou.
12. kravzonto~ aujtou` ajph`lqomen.
13. oiJ frovnimoi kopiw`si para; th`/ qavlassa/.
14. tou` profhvtou qerapeuvsanto~ kai; to;n tuflo;n kai; to;n kwfo;n oJ
ajpovstolo~ ajph`lqen.
15. tau`ta ei\pwn blepovntwn hJmw`n oJ jIhsou`~ ajnelhvmfqh ajpo; tw`n

ojfqalmw`n hJmw`n eij~ to;n oujranovn.
(page 160 blank)
Chapter 22
The Subjunctive Mood:

Conditional Sentences
22.1 Vocabulary
aJgiavzw I set apart, I sanctify
a[n A particle indicating contingency or uncertainty
(postpositive)
dikaiosuvnh, hJ righteousness
diov therefore, for this reason (conj.)
ejavn if (conj., usually used with the subjunctive)
eij if (conj., usually used with the indicative; proclitic)
ei[te if, whether (conj.)
e[xw outside (adv., used as preposition with the genitive)
eujaggelivzw I proclaim the Gospel, I bring Good News
i{na that, in order that (conj., usually used with the
subjunctive)
marturiva, hJ witness, testimony
mevso~, -h, -on middle
ejn mevsw/ in the midst
ejk mevsou from among
oijkiva, hJ house
o{lo~, -h, -on all, whole (usually attributive but always appears
in the predicate position)
o{pou where (adv.)
o{pw~ that, in order that (with the subjunctive)
o{so~, -h, -on as much as, as great as
o{tan whenever (adv., followed by the subjunctive)

paidivon, tov child
pivnw I drink
uJpavgw I go away
w|de here, hither (adv.)
wJ~ as, about (proclitic adv.)
22.2 The Subjunctive Mood

Thus far in the course we have studied only the indicative mood, the
mood of assertion. Greek has three other moods: subjunctive, optative,
and imperative. When we move outside the indicative mood we go from
assertion to contingency, from action asserted to be real toward action
that is potential. The subjunctive mood is one step removed from the
indicative. Generally speaking, the subjunctive presents the action as
uncertain but probable. Although it is an oversimplistic definition, the
subjunctive can be called the mood of probability. It can also be used to
express an exhortation or an axiomatic concept, to indicate purpose, and
to express emphatic negation. Verbs in the subjunctive have no time
significance. It is aspect, or kind of action, that matters. Whereas the
indicative mood is used mostly in independent clauses, the subjunctive is
used mostly in subordinate clauses (see section 22.5 below).
English also has the subjunctive and uses it to describe not what is,
but what might be: I might learn New Testament Greek. The subjunc-
tive is also used to express a wish: I wish I were smarter! Another
prominent use of the English subjunctive is to introduce contrary-to-
fact, or unusual or implausible, statements: If I had the money, I would
go. The idea is that I do not have the money, so I will not be going. The
Greek uses of the subjunctive are varied, as will be seen below.
22.3 Forms of the Subjunctive Mood

Good news!! The forms of the subjunctive are easy to learn, because it is
the most regular of all the Greek moods. Although there are a few per-
fects, the subjunctive is used almost exclusively in the present and aorist,
and only those tenses will be discussed in this lesson. The same subjunc-
tive endings are added to the appropriate stem, and note that primary
endings are used throughout, even in the aorist. There is no augment in
The Subjunctive Mood: Conditional Sentences 163
the aorist subjunctive because time is not a factor. Also note that the
connecting vowels in the subjunctive are lengthened: w (instead of o) and
h (instead of e).
No translations will be given in the paradigms because context is
needed to arrive at an accurate translation of the subjunctive.
Present Active Subjunctive of luvw

Singular Plural
luvw luvwmen
luvh/~ luvhte
luvh/ luvwsi(n)
Present Middle/Passive Subjunctive of luvw

Singular Plural
luvwmai luwvmeqa
luvh/ luvhsqe
luvhtai luvwntai
Aorist Active Subjunctive of luvw

Singular Plural
luvsw luvswmen
luvsh/~ luvshte
luvsh/ luvswsi(n)
Aorist Middle Subjunctive of luvw

Singular Plural
luvswmai luswvmeqa
luvsh/ luvshqe
luvshtai luvswntai
Aorist Passive Subjunctive of luvw

Singular Plural
luqw` luqw`men
luqh`/~ luqh`te
luqh`/ luqw`si(n)
These same endings are also used with the second aorist:
Second Aorist Active: livpw, livph/~, livph/, etc.
Second Aorist Middle: livpwmai, livph/, livphtai, etc.
Second Aorist Passive: grafw`, grafh`/~, grafh`/, etc.
1) Verbs that are deponent in the indicative are also deponent

in the subjunctive.
2) The subjunctive is negated by mhv.
3) Be careful with forms that could be parsed as either subjunc-

tive or indicative. For example, luvw could be either present
active indicative first singular or present active subjunctive
first singular. luvh/ could be either present active subjunctive
third singular or present middle/passive subjunctive second
singular or present middle/passive indicative second singu-
lar. And with contract verbs of the timavw type, it is impos-
sible to distinguish the subjunctive from the indicative in the
present tense. Context must be your guide when choosing
between the two.
Also note the conjugation of ginwvskw and ajnabaivnw in the second aorist
subjunctive:
gnw` gnw`men ajnabw` ajnabw`men

gnw/`~ gnw`te ajnabh`/~ ajnabh`te
gnw`/ gnw`si(n) ajnabh`/ ajnabw`si(n)
22.4 Present Subjunctive of eijmiv

The present subjunctive of eijmiv is simply the subjunctive endings with
accents:
Singular Plural
w\ w\men
h`/~ h\te
h\/ w\si(n)
22.5 Uses of the Subjunctive

The subjunctive is used much more widely in Greek than it is in English.
The word subjunctive comes from the Latin word meaning to sub-
join or to subordinate. The main use of the subjunctive is to intro-
duce subordinate clauses that complete the statement made by the main
verb. However, the subjunctive is also used in certain kinds of main, or
independent, clauses. The uses of the subjunctive in Greek include the
following:
1) The hortatory subjunctive is used to exhort. This usage of the sub-

junctive is limited to the first person plural. In translation, the En-
glish words Let us are used to introduce the exhortation. Example:
ajgapw`men ajllhvlou~ (Let us love one another1 Jn. 4:7)
2) The subjunctive of prohibition is used to express a negative com-

mand. In this usage only the second person aorist subjunctive is
used. It forbids the start of an action. Example: mh; merimnhvshte
eij~ th;n au[rion (Dont worry about tomorrow OR Dont start
worrying about tomorrowMt. 6:34). The imperative mood is used
to express other types of commands (see Chapter 23).
3) The deliberative subjunctive is used in two ways. It may ask a ques-

tion, the answer to which is uncertain or requires deliberation. If the
question is rhetorical, no answer is expected. The deliberative sub-
junctive appears mostly in the first person, singular or plural. Ex-
ample: ti; ou\n poihvswmen; (What then should we do?Lk. 3:10).
4) Emphatic negation is expressed by ouj mhv and the aorist subjunctive.

Note that in Greek double negatives do not necessarily cancel each
other out as they do in English. The use of this construction strongly
or emphatically denies that something will happen.Words such as
never, certainly not, or by no means may be used in transla-
tion. Example: to;n ejrcovmenon pro;~ ejme; ouj mh; ejkbavlw e[xw (The
one who comes to me I will by no means cast outJn. 6:37)
5) The subjunctive is frequently used in subordinate clauses with the

conjunctions i{na and, less frequently, o{pw~ to indicate purpose.
Example: h\lqomen, i{na blevywmen to;n kuvrion (We came, in order
that we might see the Lord). Purpose clauses are called final
because they indicate the purpose of the main clause of the sentence.
Note that the use of the subjunctive after i{na does not imply doubt as
to whether the action of the verb will be fulfilled. The focus is on the
intention of the main verb, whether or not that action is actually
accomplished.
22.6 Conditional Sentences

A special category of the subjunctive is its use in conditional sentences.
In such a statement an action is conditioned upon something else hap-
pening. A complete conditional sentence has two clauses: an if clause,
called the protasis (a putting forward) and a then clause, called the
apodosis (a giving back). Example: If he is studying Greek, (then)
he will pass the final exam. Generally speaking, there are four types or
classes of Greek conditional sentences:
1) First class conditionuses eij and the indicative mood in the protasis
and almost any mood or tense in the apodosis. A first class condition
assumes something to be true for the sake of argument. It attempts to
draw the listener or reader into the discussion. Example: If he is
studying Greek (and lets assume that he is), he will pass the final
exam. Also consider the following example: eij uiJo;~ ei\ tou` qeou`,
bavle seauto;n kavtw (If you are the Son of Godand the assump-
tion is that he is the Son of Godcast yourself downMt. 4:6)
2) Second class conditionuses eij and a secondary tense of the in-

dicative mood in the protasis, while a[n appears with a secondary
tense of the indicative in the apodosis. A second class condition
expresses something that is contrary-to-fact. In this usage the speaker
assumes the premise to be untrue, as in the sentence: If I had the
money, I would go with you (but I dont, so I wont). Example:
kuvrie, eij h\~ w|de oujk a[n ajpevqanen oJ ajdelfov~ mou (Lord, if you
had been here my brother would not have diedJn. 11:21).
3) Third class conditionuses ejavn and the subjunctive in the protasis,

and any tense or mood in the apodosis. Third class conditions are
further subdivided as follows:
a) The future more probable condition is used to present an

action or event as uncertain of fulfillment, but still likely to
occur, as in the sentence: If he should study Greek (and he
probably will), he will pass the final exam. The verb in the
apodosis is usually in the future tense. Example: tou`to
poihvsomen eja;n ejpitrevph/ oJ qeov~ (This we shall do, if
God permitHeb. 6:3). The idea is that we are not now
doing it but it is probable that we will on the condition of
Gods permitting us to do so. Whether or not the protasis
can be assumed to be true must be determined by context in
exegesis.
b) The present general condition does not say that something

might happen, but rather states a general or axiomatic truth.
A present tense verb must be used in the apodosis. Example:
ejan; ti~ ajgapa`/ to;n kovsmon, oujk e[stin hJ ajgavph tou` patro;~
ejn aujtw`/ (If anyone loves the world, the love of the Father
is not in him1 Jn. 2:15).
4) Fourth class conditionuses eij and the present or aorist of the

optative mood in the protasis, and a[n plus the present or aorist of the
optative mood in the apodosis. The fourth class condition is often
called the possible future condition. The optative mood occurred
regularly in classical Greek, but over time use of the subjunctive
increased while use of the optative decreased, so that by New Testa-
ment times the optative was infrequently used. The optative occurs
less than 70 times in the New Testament. Its main use is to express a
wish and, in fact, its name comes from the Latin word for I wish.
As in all moods other than the indicative, it is negated by mhv. The
most common example of the optative in the New Testament is the
Pauline expression mh; gevnoiteMay it not be (see Rom. 6:2).
Paradigms of the optative will not be presented here and are best
learned by observation. A distinctive of the optative forms is the
presence of oi, ei, or ai after the verb stem. Given the decreasing
use of the optative by the Koine period, it is not surprising that there
are no complete fourth class conditional statements in the New Tes-
tament. In the following example, words are added in translation to
complete the conditional idea: aj l l’ eij kai; pav s coite dia;
dikaiosuvnhn, macavrioiBut even if you should suffer for righ-
teousness, [you would be] happy1 Pet. 3:14.
Summary of conditional sentences:
Class Protasis Apodosis Fulfillment
First eij + indicative any mood/tense Assumed for sake

of argument
Second eij + secondary a[n + secondary Impossibility

indicative indicative
Third ejavn + subjunctive future indicative Probability

ejavn + subjunctive present indicative Present general
Fourth eij + optative a[n plus the optative Possibility
It should be noted that there is not universal agreement among grammar-

ians concerning the categories of Greek conditional statements. The de-
bate over this matter is best left for intermediate and advanced language
study.

Mt. 5:20 Jn. 3:16 1 Cor. 15:32
Mt. 12:26-27 Jn. 5:46 1 Jn. 2:1
Jn. 3:7 1 Cor. 11:22
22.8 Exercises
1. uJpavgwmen ejk touvtou tou` oi[kou.
2. eja;n ei[pwmen o{ti aJmartivan oujk e[comen, th;n ajlhvqeian oujk

levgomen.
3. eij au{th ejstin hJ marturiva tw`n ijdovntwn to;n Cristo;n, decovmeqa

aujthvn.
4. oij mh; pisteuvonte~ tw`/ lovgw/ tou` qeou` ouj mh; swqwvsin.
5. mh; eijsevlqh/~ eij~ tou;~ tovpou~ tw`n ponhrw`n.
6. oJ uiJo;~ tou` qeou` ajpevqanen, i{na lavbwmen zwh;n aijwvnion.
7. ajgapw`men tou`~ ajdelfou;~ hJmw`n wJ~ oJ Cristo;~ hJma`~ hjgavphke.
8. ejkhvruxan oiJ pistoi; to; eujaggevlion ejn o{lw/ tw`/ kovsmw/.
9. eujhggelivsamen e[xw th`~ ejkklhsiva~ ejn mevsw/ tw`n o[clwn.
10. ajkouvousi to;n lovgon tou` kuvriou, i{na ginwvskwsi th;n ajlhvqeian.
11. hJ mhv t hr ej p ev m ye tou` ~ uiJ o u; ~ auj t h` ~ , o{ p w~ blev p wsi th; n

dikaiosuvnhn tou` kuvriou.
12. eja;n eijsevlqh/~ eij~ to;n oi\kon tou` ajpovstolou, didavxei se.
13. eij h[kousan to; eujaggevlion oiJ uiJoi; hJmw`n, a[n ejswvqhsan.
14. kai; ejrcwvmeqa su;n aujtw`/.
15. hJgiavsqhmen uJpo; tou` qeou`.

Chapter 23
Imperative Mood
23.1 Vocabulary
ajgoravzw I buy
ajpaggevllw I tell, I proclaim
a[cri until
(adv.used as preposition with the genitive)
dokevw I think, I suppose
eujquv~ immediately (adv.)
h[dh now, already (adv.)
ijdouv Look! Behold! Here (or there) isimperative
of ei\don
iJmavtion, tov clothing
koinwniva, hJ fellowship
ou\~, wjtov~, tov ear
pouv~, podov~, oJ foot
proskunevw I worship (ususally with the dative)
speivrw I sow
spevrma, spevrmato~, tov seed, offspring
tev and (weaker in force than kaiv)
caivrw I rejoice
yuchv, hJ soul, self, life
23.2 Introducing the Greek Imperative

As in English, the imperative mood in Greek is used to give commands,
prohibit actions, and make requests. The imperative is the mood of in-
tention and is the furthest removed from certainty, because it is depen-

dent upon one person imposing his will upon another. As in all moods
outside the indicative, tense distinctions in the imperative have to do
with kind of action, rather than time of action. The imperative occurs in
the present, aorist, and perfect tenses. Since the perfect imperative oc-
curs only once in the New Testament (Mk. 4:39), its forms will not be
given here. An important difference between the Greek and English im-
perative is that Greek uses the imperative in both the second and third
persons. For English speakers it is difficult to understand how there can
be a third person imperative and even more difficult to translate it accu-
rately into English. See #4 in Uses of the Imperative in section 23.5
below.
23.3 Forms of the Imperative Mood

Since time of action is not a factor in the imperative, there is no aug-
ment. In English the imperative appears only in the second person, but
in Greek there is also a third person imperative. Translate the second
person as the usual English command with you (singular or plural) as
the implied subject, as in: Believe on the Lord (active) and be saved
(passive). Use the word let when translating the third person impera-
tive, as in: Let him read the book. There is no first person imperative;
the hortatory subjunctive expresses the imperative idea in the first per-
son (plural).
Present Active Imperative of luvw

Singular Plural
2nd luè loose luvete loose
3rd luevtw let him loose luevtwsan let them loose
Present Middle/Passive Imperative of luvw

Singular Plural
2nd luvou loose yourself/ luvesqe loose yourselves/
be loosed be loosed
3rd luevsqw let him loose himself/ luevsqwsan let them loose
let him be loosed themselves/
let them be loosed
Imperative Mood 173
First Aorist Active Imperative of luvw

Singular Plural
2nd lu`son loose luvsate loose
3rd lusavtw let him loose lusavtwsan let them loose
First Aorist Middle Imperative of luvw

Singular Plural
2nd lu`sai loose yourself luvsasqe loose yourselves
3rd lusavsqw let him loose lusavsqwsan let them loose
himself themselves
First Aorist Passive Imperative of luvw

Singular Plural
2nd luvqhti be loosed luvqhte be loosed
3rd luqhvtw let him be loosed luqhvtwsan let them be loosed
Second Aorist Active Imperative of livpw

Singular Plural
2nd livpe leave livpete leave
3rd lipevtw let him leave lipevtwsan let them leave
Second Aorist Middle Imperative of livpw

Singular Plural
2nd lipou` leave yourself livpesqe leave yourselves
3rd lipevsqw let him leave lipevsqwsan let them leave
himself themselves
Second Aorist Passive Imperative of livpw

Singular Plural
2nd livphqi be left livphte be left
3rd liphvtw let him be left liphvtwsan let them be left
Present Imperative of eijmiv

Singular Plural
2nd i[sqi be e[ste be
3rd e[stw let him be e[stwsan let them be
1) Note that the second person plural indicative and imperative have
the same endings, so be careful to distinguish between them when
translating. As always, let context be your guide! The potential prob-
lem is avoided in the aorist by remembering that the imperative does
not have an augment.
2) Verbs that are deponent in the indicative will also be deponent in the
imperative. An example is givnomai:
Singular Plural
2nd givnou become givnesqe become
3rd ginevsqw let him become ginevsqwsan let them become
Example: givnesqe ta; tevkna tou` qeou` (Become children of God!)
3) The negative particle mhv is used with the imperative.
23.4 Aspect in the Imperative

As in the subjunctive, kind of action, not time, distinguishes the present
and aorist tenses in the imperative. As a rule, the aorist imperative ex-
presses a command without reference to its duration or repetition. It
focuses on the action as a whole, or in summary, and usually denotes a
sense of urgency. The aorist imperative ordinarily commands a specific
action to be done in a particular situation, while the present imperative
generally expresses a command to continue an action in progress, or to
do something repeatedly. It is also used to express a general precept,
i.e., a principle or rule which imposes a standard of action or conduct.
When expressing general precepts, the present imperative has the sense
make it your habit to do or do whenever the situation arises.
Imperative Mood 175
23.5 Uses of the Imperative

1) Positive Command
This is the primary use of the imperative. It attempts to impose the will
of one person upon another. Examples: lu`son aujtovn (Loose him!)
e[ste ajgaqa; tevkna (Be good children!) baptivsqhti (Be baptized!)
2) Prohibition
The present imperative is generally used to prohibit the continuance of

an action in progress. You may use the word stop in translation if it is
warranted by the context. In general precepts the negative present im-
perative looks to the future and has the sense make it your habit not
to. In other words, this use of the imperative forbids an action that is
likely to be continuous or repeated. Sometimes only the context deter-
mines whether the force of the imperative is to stop an action in progress
or to forbid an action that might become habitual. Example: mh; luve
aujtovn (Stop loosing him!/Dont (make it your habit to) loose him!)
Remember that the second person aorist subjunctive is used to forbid the
start of an action (see Chapter 22).
3) Entreaty
An entreaty is a command softened to a request. Sometimes the word

please is used in translation to soften the command. Example: pavter
a{gie, thvrhson aujtou;~ ejn tw`/ ojnovmativ sou . . . (Holy Father, {please}
preserve them in your name. . .Jn. 17:11).
4) Third Person Commands
The third person imperative is normally translated Let him say, let
her say, let them say, etc. Keep in mind that this is actually a com-
mand and should not be confused with the English idea of permission.
Example: luevtw to;n ponhro;n dou`lon (Let him loose the evil ser-
vant). The correct sense is He must loose the evil servant or I
command him to loose the evil servant.
23.6 A Summary of the Moods

The following sentences illustrate the Greek moods as presented thus
far:
Indicative: He is studying Greek. Makes an assertion.
Subjunctive: If he studies, he will learn Greek. Action is prob-

able, but not yet occurring.
Optative: Oh, if only he might study Greek. Action is pos-

sible, but more in the form of a wish.
Imperative: Study Greek! The action is possible, but involves

one person attempting to exert influence on an-
other to produce action.

Lk. 6:8 1 Thess. 5:16-20
Jn. 14:1 1 Jn. 2:15
Acts 16:31 Rev. 2:17
Imperative Mood 177
23.7 Exercises
1. hjgovrasan oiJ maqhtai; tou;~ a[rtou~ kai; to; iJmavtion ejn th`/ povlei.
2. pivne to; u{dwr th`~ zwh`~ kai; ejsqive to;n a[rton th`~ zwh`~.
3. ajkouvsate ta; rJh`mata tou` kuvriou kai; swvqhte.
4. mh; krivnete, i{na mh; kriqh`te.
5. dokevte ta; aujta; wJ~ oj Cristov~.
6. oiJ pistoi; ginevsqwsan presbuvteroi ejn th`/ ejkklhsiva/.
7. i[sqi uiJo;~ tou` fwto;~ kai; mh; i[sqi uiJo;~ th`~ skotiva~.
8. oiJ e[conte~ w\ta ajkousavntwsan.
9. givnou maqhth;~ tou` kuvriou.
10. proskunei`te tw`/ qew`/ ejn pneuvmati kai; ejn ajlhvqeia/.
11. favge eujqu;~ to;n kalo;n karpovn.
12. mh; pisteuvete ta; ponhra; pneuvmata.
13. caivrete ejn tw`/ kuvriw/.
14. ajgapa`te tou;~ uJma`~ mh; ajgapw`nta~.
15. khruvssete o{lw/ tw`/ kovsmw/ to; eujaggevlion.

(page 178 blank)
Chapter 24
Additional Pronouns and Numerals

24.1 Vocabulary
ajllhvlwn (gen.) (of) one another
eJautou`, -h`~, -ou` (gen.) (of) himself, herself, itself
ejmautou`, -h`~, (gen.) (of) myself
ejmov~, -hv, -ovn my, mine
hJmevtero~, -a, -on our
i[dio~, -a, -on; i[dioi, -ai, -a his, her, its; their (ones own)
mhdeiv~, mhdemiva, mhdevn no one, nothing
(usually with moods other
than the indicative)
o{~, h{, o{n who, which, what
o{sti~, h{ti~, o{ti who, whoever, whatever
oujdeiv~, oujdemiva, oujdevn no one, nothing
(usually with the indicative)
seautou`, -h`~ (of) yourself
sov~, shv, sovn your, yours
tiv~, tiv who? what?
ti~, ti someone, something, anyone,
anything, a certain one (enclitic)
toiou`to~, toiauvth, toiou`ton such, of such kind
uJmevtero~, -a, -on your (pl.)
devka ten
deuvtero~, -a, -on second
duvo two
dwvdeka twelve
ei{~, miva, e{n one
e{katon one hundred
eJptav seven
pevnte five
tevssare~, tevssara four
tevtarto~, -h, -on fourth
trei`~, triva three
trivto~, -h, -on third
24.2 Additional Greek Pronouns

We introduced personal pronouns, demonstrative pronouns, and inten-
sive pronouns earlier in the course. This lesson presents additional pro-
nouns that are important for the study of the Greek New Testament.
24.3 Relative Pronoun: o{~, h{, o{n

(who, which)
A relative pronoun stands for a noun or other substantive previously
mentioned, called its antecedent. The antecedent of a relative pronoun
may be expressed or implied. The forms of the relative pronoun are:
Singular

N o{~ h{ o{
GA ou| h|~ ou|
DLI w|/ h|/ w|/
AC o{n h{n o{
Plural
N oi{ ai{ a{
GA w|n w|n w|n
DLI oi|~ ai|~ oi|~
AC ou{~ a{~ a{
Additional Pronouns and Numerals 181
Note that every form of the relative pronoun has a rough breathing mark.
Be careful not to confuse the relative pronoun with some forms of the
definite article. There is no vocative case for the relative pronoun.
A relative pronoun must agree with its antecedent in gender and

number, but its case is determined by its own function in the subordinate
clause, which is called a relative clause. A relative clause is a depen-
dent, or subordinate, clause that modifies a noun or other substantive.
Consider the following examples:
1) oJ a[nqrwpo~ o{~ levgei tw`/ didavskalw/v ejstin oJ ajdelfov~ mou.
The man who is speaking to the teacher is my brother.
2) oJ a[nqrwpo~ w|/ levgousivn ejstin oJ ajdelfov~ mou.
The man to whom they are speaking is my brother.
In both examples the relative pronoun is masculine, singular to agree

with the antecedent, a[nqrwpo~, but the case of the relative pronoun
varies according to its use in the relative clause, i.e., nominative in the
first example because o{~ is the subject in the relative clause and dative in
the second example because w|/ is the indirect object in the relative clause.
Sometimes the relative pronoun is so closely related to its antecedent
that it is attracted to the antecedents case. Usually when attraction
occurs, the relative pronoun should be accusative by its function in the
relative clause but instead is attracted to the genitive or dative case of its
antecedent. Example: mnhmoneuvte tou` lovgou ou| ejgw; ei[pon uJmi`n (Re-
member the word which I spoke to you). Note that in this example the
verb mnhmoneuvw takes its object in the genitive case. In rare cases,
indirect attraction occurs, where the antecedent is attracted to the case of
the relative pronoun. Example: to;n a[rton o{n klw`men . . . (The bread
which we break . . .1 Cor. 10:16). Often the antecedent of a relative
pronoun is not expressed, but understood. Example: o{n e[cei~ oujc e[stin
sou ajnhvr (He whom you have is not your husbandJn. 4:18). In this
case the relative pronoun may be translated he who, she who, they
who, that which, etc.
24.4 Indefinite Relative Pronoun

This pronoun is formed by combining the relative pronoun o{~ with the
indefinite pronoun ti~ (see Section 24. 6)o{sti~. Although both parts
are inflected, the indefinite relative pronoun rarely occurs outside the
nominative singular and plural in the New Testament.
Singular: o{sti~, h{ti~, o{ti (o{ti is sometimes written o{ ti to

distinguish it from the conjunction o{ti).
Plural: oi{tine~, ai{tine~, a{tina
In general, o{sti~ is considered to be indefinite (whoever), and o{~ is

definite (who), but o{sti~ is often translated the same as o{~. There is
also a qualitative use of o{sti~, when it focuses on the nature or essence
of the thing in view, as in Rom. 1:25: oi{tine~ methvllaxan th;n ajlhvqeian
tou` qeou` ejn tw`/ yeuvdei (Who were of such nature/the very ones who/
the ones indeed who exchanged the truth of God for a lie).
Related to the indefinite relative pronoun is the use of a relative

pronoun, which does not refer to a specific person or thing, with the
subjunctive. In this usage the relative pronoun is followed by the contin-
gent particle a[n, or sometimes by the conjunction ejavn. Example: o{~ dÆ
a[n pivh/ ejk tou` u{dato~ ou| ejgw; dwvsw aujtw`/ . . . (But whoever should
drink of the water that I will give him . . .Jn. 4:14). Note that in
translation the word ever may be added to the appropriate word: who-
ever, whichever, etc. Also note that the relative pronoun (ou|) is
attracted to the case of its antecedent (u{dato~).
24.5 Interrogative Pronoun: tiv~, tiv (who,

what)
As in English, this type of pronoun asks the question who, which,
what? Examples: ti;~ ei\de to;n kuvrion; (Who saw the Lord?) ti;
ei\de~; (What did you see?) The interrogative pronoun may also intro-
duce an indirect question: ginwvskei~ ti; epoivhsa; (Do you know what
I did?). The forms of the interrogative pronoun are:
Singular Plural
Masc./Fem. Neut. Masc./Fem Neut.
N tiv~ tiv tivne~ tivna
GA tivno~ tivno~ tivnwn tivnwn
DLI tivni tivni tivsi(n) tivsi(n)
AC tivna tiv tivna~ tivna
Note that the masculine and feminine share the same forms. The neuter
accusative singular (tiv) often functions adverbially in the meaning why?
Example: ti; levgei~ tou`to; (Why are you saying this?)
It should be noted that questions in Greek expecting a yes answer

have the negative particle ouj, while questions expecting a no answer
have mhv. Consider the following examples:
oujk uiJo;~ ejstin tou` profhvtou; (This is the prophets son, isnt it?)
mh; ajpevrcei~; (Surely you arent leaving?)
24.6 Indefinite Pronoun

The Greek indefinite pronoun, ti~/ti is declined exactly like the inter-
rogative pronoun but, because it is enclitic, it has no accent except in
special situations. This pronoun may be translated as anyone, any-
body, anything, someone, somebody, a certain one, etc. It
may be used substantivally: ti~ ejsqive to;n a[rton (Someone is eating
the bread); eijdovmen tina (We saw someone), or adjectivally:
a[nqrwpoi tine~ (certain men). When used as a modifier, the indefi-
nite pronoun usually follows the noun.
24.7 Reciprocal Pronoun

The reciprocal pronoun represents an interchange of action between
members of a plural subject. The reciprocal pronoun is formed from the
adjective a[llo~ and appears only in the following forms in the New
Testament: ajllhvlwn (gen./abl. pl.), ajllhvloi~ (dat./loc./inst. pl.),
ajllhvlou~ (acc. pl.). Example: ajgapw`men ajllhvlou~ (Let us love one
another).
24.8 Reflexive Pronoun

The reflexive pronoun refers back to the subject of its clause and indi-
cates that the subject is acting upon itself or in its own interest. As such,
it is an alternative to the middle voice to express these ideas. The forms
of the reflexive pronoun are:
First Person
Singular Plural
Masculine Feminine Masculine Feminine
GA ejmautou` ejmauth`~ eJautw`n eJautw`n
DLI ejmautw`/ ejmauth`/ eJautoi`~ eJautai`~
AC ejmautovn ejmauthvn eJautouv~ eJautav~
Second Person
Singular Plural
Masculine Feminine Masculine Feminine
GA seautou` seauth`~ eJautw`n eJautw`n
DLI seautw`/ seauth`/ eJautoi`~ eJautai`~
AC seautovn seauthvn eJautouv~ eJautav~
Third Person
Singular Plural
Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut.
GA eJautou` eJauth`~ eJautou` eJautw`n eJautw`n eJautw`n
DLI eJautw`/ eJauth`/ eJautw`/ eJautoi`~ eJautai`~ eJautoi`~
AC eJautovn eJauthvn eJautov eJautouv~ eJautav~ eJautav
Note that all three genders have the same forms in the plural.
The reflexive pronoun is not used in the nominative case. Greek uses
instead the intensive pronoun aujtov~ in the nominative case (see Chapter
7). Consider the following example: Su; peri; seautou` maturei`~ (You
bear witness of yourselfJn. 8:13). Sometimes the plural of the reflex-
ive pronoun is used in place of the reciprocal pronoun, as in Col. 3:13 in
the Verses for Application below.
24.9 Possessive Pronoun

The possessive pronoun, also called the possessive adjective, is some-
times used instead of the genitive case of the personal pronoun to show
possession. This pronoun is declined like a regular adjective of the first
and second declension (see the vocabulary list for this lesson: ejmov~,
sov~, i[dio~, hJmevtero~, uJmevtero~). This pronoun stands in the attribu-
tive position. Example: oJ ejmo;~ lovgo~ OR oJ lovgo~ oJ ejmov~. Both are
translated My word. However, oJ lovgo~ mou is the usual way to ren-
der my word in Greek.
24.10 Negative Pronoun

The negative pronouns oujdeiv~ and mhdeiv~ have identical forms and
appear in the singular only. These pronouns are a combination of the
numeral one with the conjunction oujdev and the negative particle mhdev.
See the declension of the numeral ei{~, miva, e{n below. mhdeiv~ is used
outside the indicative mood. Examples: oujdei;~ ginwvskei tou`to (No
one knows this); mhdei;~ plavnatw se (Let no one deceive you).

N oujdeiv~ oujdemiva oujdevn
GA oujdenov~ oujdemia`~ oujdenov~
DLI oujdeniv oujdemia`/ oujdeniv
AC oujdevna oujdemivan oujdevn
mhdeiv~ is declined like oujdeiv~
24.11 The Numerals ei{~, duvo, trei`~, tevssare~

Cardinal numerals indicate sequence or the number of persons or things
(one, two, three, etc.), and ordinal numerals indicate priority or position
(first, second, third). Ordinal numbers function like, and are declined
like, adjectives. Examples: prw`to~, -h, -on and deuvtero~, -a, -on.
Cardinal numbers are declined according to a variety of patterns, as in
the following examples:

N ei{~ miva e{n
GA eJnov~ mia`~ eJnov~
DLI eJniv mia/` eJniv
AC e{na mivan e{n
Both ei{~ and e{n are accented and take rough breathing throughout. Do
not confuse these forms with the prepositions eij~ and ejn.
Masculine/Feminine/Neuter
N duvo
GA duvo
DLI dusiv(n)
AC duvo
All three genders have the same forms.
Masculine/Feminine Neuter
N trei`~ triva
GA triw`n triw`n
DLI trisiv(n) trisiv(n)
AC trei`~ triva
Masculine/Feminine Neuter
N tevssare~ tevssara
GA tessarw`n tessarw`n
DLI tevssarsi tevssarsi
AC tevssare~ tevssara
The masculine and feminine share the same forms.
Note that there is no plural for one and no singulars for two, three,
and four. The vocabulary list for this lesson presents other numerals
that occur prominently in the New Testament. The numerals devka,
dwvdeka, e{katon, eJptav, and pevnte are not declined in Greek.

Mt. 12:48 Jn. 7:16 Jn. 18:4
Mt. 17:5 Jn. 8:13 Col. 3:13
Lk. 1:5 Jn. 13:34 1 Jn. 1:2
Lk. 4:22 Jn. 14:6
24.13 Exercises
1. ginwvskousi ti; ejpoivhsa~;
2. koinwnivan e[comen metÆ ajllhvlwn.
3. ouj oJ pathvr ejstin tou` ajpovstolou;
4. ei[domevn tina ejn tw`/ oi[kw/.
5. oJ ejmo;~ lovgo~ ejstin hJ ajlhvqeia.
6. ti;~ ginwvskei th;n kardivan ajnqrwvpou;
7. oJ a[nqrwpo~ o{n ei[dete oJ ejmo;~ pathvr.
8. ajgapw`si ajllhvlou~;
9. ti;~ oJ maqhth;~ w|/ e[lege~ ejn th`/ ejkklhsiva/;
10. o{~ pisteuvei eij~ to;n Cristo;n e[cei zwh;n aijwvnion.
11. pevnte a[rtou~ e[cousi.
12. eu|ron oujdevna ejn tw`/ oi[kw/.
13. oiJ prw`toi e[sontai e[scatoi.
14. oiJ dwvdeka h\san ejn toi`~ i[dioi~ oi[koi~.
15. oJ ajpovstolo~ h[lqen ejn th`/ hJmevra/ th`/ trivth/.

Chapter 25
Irregular Adjectives and Comparison

of Adjectives
25.1 Vocabulary
a[diko~, -on unrighteous, unjust
ajlhqhv~, ajlhqev~ true, genuine
ajlhqinov~, -hv, -ovn real, true
a[rti now (adv.)
ajsqenhv~, ajsqenev~ weak, sick
au[rion tomorrow (adv.)
douleuvw I serve (with the dative)
ejperwtavw I ask, I question
h[ or, than (conj.)
ijscurov~, -av, -ovn strong
loipov~, -hv, -ovn rest, remaining, other
to; loipovn finally, from now on
tou` loipou` finally, in the future
mavllon more (adv.)
mevga~, megavlh, mevga large, great
meivzwn, -on greater (comparative degree of mevga~)
misevw I hate
o{qen where, from where (adv.)
paravgw I pass by, I pass away
pa`~, pa`sa, pa`n every, all, whole
poluv~, pollhv, poluv much, many
pleivwn, -on more (comparative degree of poluv~)
pou` where, whither

pra`gma, pravgmato~, tov thing, matter, deed, event
shvmeron today (adv.)
tevleio~, -a, -on complete, perfect
25.2 Irregular Adjectives

So far we have learned adjectives that follow the endings patterns of the
first and second declensions. Some adjectives follow the pattern of the
third declension and others follow a combination of two or more declen-
sion patterns.
25.3 pa`~, pa`sa, pa`n

The adjective pa`~, pa`sa, pa`n is an important irregular adjective, which
occurs more than 1200 times in the New Testament. It follows the third
declension in the masculine and neuter and the first declension in the
feminine. pa`~ is used in a variety of ways:
1) Predicate position with a noun, usually in the meaning all

pa`n to; sw`ma (all the body).
2) Attributive position with a noun, usually in the meaning

wholehJ pa`sa povli~ (the whole city).
3) With an anarthrous noun, usually in the meaning every

with a singular nounpa`~ a[nqrwpo~ (every man), and
in the meaning all with a plural nounpavnte~ a[nqrwpoi
(all men).
4) Predicate position with a participle, in the meaning every-

one who or everything whichpa`~ oJ pisteuvwn (ev-
eryone who believes).
5) pa`~ is also frequently used substantivallypa`~ (every-

one), pavnte~ (all people), pavnta (all things).
Declension of pa`~, pa`sa, pa`n:

Irregular Adjectives and Comparison of Adjectives 191
Singular Plural
Masc. Fem. Neuter Masc. Fem. Neuter
N pa`~ pa`sa pa`n pavnte~ pa`sai pavnta
GA pantov~ pavsh~ pantov~ pavntwn pasw`n pavntwn
DLI pantiv pavsh/ pantiv pa`si(n) pavsai~ pa`si(n)
AC pavnta pa`san pa`n pavnta~ pavsa~ pavnta
25.4 mevga~, megavlh, mevga

The adjective mevga~, megavlh, mevga generally follows the second de-
clension patterns of endings in the masculine and neuter but has short
forms in the nominative and accusative singular. This adjective follows
the first declension in the feminine.
Singular Plural
N mevga~ megavlh mevga megavloi megavlai megavla
GA megavlou megavlh~ megavlou megavlwn megavlwn megavlwn
DLI megavlw/ megavlh/ megavlw/ megavloi~ megavlai~ megavloi~
AC mevgan megavlhn mevga megavlou~ megavla~ megavla
25.5 poluv~, pollhv, poluv

The declension of poluv~, pollhv, poluv also follows the second declen-
sion in the masculine and neuter, with the exception of the short and
irregular nominative and accusative singular forms. The feminine fol-
lows first declension forms.
Singular Plural
N poluv~ pollhv poluv polloiv pollaiv pollav
GA pollou` pollh`~ pollou` pollw`n pollw`n pollw`n
DLI pollw`/ pollh`/ pollw`/ polloi`~ pollai`~ polloi`~
AC poluvn pollhvn poluv pollouv~ pollav~ pollav
This adjective is often used substantivally: polloiv (many men/many

persons); pollav (many things).
25.6 ajlhqhv~, ajlhqev~

The adjective ajlhqhv~, ajlhqev~ follows third declension patterns through-
out. There are approximately 60 adjectives of this type in the New Tes-
tament and all are declined like ajlhqhv~, ajlhqev~. Note that this is a two-
termination adjective, i.e., the masculine and the feminine have the same
endings:
Singular Plural
Masc./Fem. Neuter Masc./Fem. Neuter
N ajlhqhv~ ajlhqev~ ajlhqei`~ ajlhqh`
GA ajlhqou`~ ajlhqou`~ ajlhqw`n ajlhqw`n
DLI ajlhqei` ajlhqei` ajlhqevsi(n) ajlhqevsi(n)
AC ajlhqh` ajlhqev~ ajlhqei`~ ajlhqh`
25.7 Comparison of Adjectives

As in English, Greek adjectives have three degrees: positive, compara-
tive, superlative, as in small, smaller, smallest. The positive degree re-
fers to the quality of one person or thing and is simply the regular adjec-
tival form (small, beautiful, good, etc.). The comparative degree compares
two things or persons (smaller, more beautiful, better, etc.). The super-
lative degree compares three or more things or persons to stress the
highest degree of quality (smallest, most beautiful, best, etc.). Some
words compare regularly in English (small, smaller) and others compare
irregularly (good, better). The same is true in Greek. When a Greek
adjective is regular it will add -tero~, -tera, -teron to the stem for the
comparative forms and -tato~, -tath, -taton for the superlative. Ex-
ample: ijscurov~ (strong), ijscurovtero~ (stronger), ijscurovtato~ (stron-
gest). Sometimes the o of the stem in the positive degree is lengthened to
w in the comparative and superlative. Example: sofov~ (wise), sofwvtero~
(wiser), sofwvtato~ (wisest). Other adjectives form the comparative
irregularly and must be learned by observation. Examples: ajgaqov~ (good),
kreivsswn (better); kakov~ (bad), ceivrwn (worse); mevga~ (great), meivzwn
(greater); poluv~ (much), pleivwn (more); mikrov~ (little), ejlavssw (less),
ejlavcisto~ (least). The above comparative forms ending in -wn are two-
termination adjectives that are declined according to the third declen-
sion, but there are exceptions. Only the nominative singular forms of
these comparative adjectives are used in this lesson.
Irregular Adjectives and Comparison of Adjectives 193
When two substantives are compared in English, we must place than

after the comparative adjective (He is smaller than his brother). Greek
expresses comparison in one of two ways:
1) The same as in English, by placing the comparative particle

h[ (than) before the second noun or substantive. Example:
ou|to~ oJ oi\kov~ ejsti mikrovtero~ h[ ekei`no~ (This house is
smaller than that one).
2) The second noun is placed in the genitive case. Example:

ou|to~ oJ oi\kov~ ejsti mikrovtero~ ejkeivnoutranslated the
same as example #1.
The superlative degree is not often used in Greek. Instead, the compara-
tive is sometimes used to express a superlative idea. Also, the superla-
tive may be used to express what is called an elative sense, meaning
very, or exceedingly. For these uses of the comparative see 1 Cor.
4:3 and 1 Cor. 13:13 in the Verses for Application section below.
Adverbs may also be used in the comparative and superlative de-
grees. The comparative ending is -teron and the superlative is -taton.
You should recognize these as the neuter accusative singular adjectival
endings. Generally, only adverbs derived from adjectives can form the
comparative and superlative degrees but there are, of course, exceptions!
25.8 Alpha Privative

The prefix a- (an- before a vowel) is used as a negative compounding
element in Greek. It functions like the English negative prefixes un- and
in-. Examples are a[diko~, -on (unrighteous, unjust) and a[pisto~, -on
(unfaithful, unbelieving).

Mt. 26:27 Jn. 3:16 1 Cor. 15:9
Mt. 27:46 1 Cor. 13:13 Heb. 4:12
Mk. 13:6 1 Cor. 4:3 1 Jn. 3:20
25.10 Exercises
1. oujc hJ yuch; pleivwn tou` a[rtou kai; to; sw`ma tou` iJmavtiou;
2. oJ jIhsou`~ ejqeravpeuse pollou;~ ejn toi`~ o[cloi~.
3. dia; tou`to shvmeron ejn uJmi`n polloi; ajsqenei`~.
4. oiJ loipoi; ouj ejpivsteusan eij~ to;n kuvrion.
5. oujk e[stin dou`lo~ meivzwn h[ oJ kuvrio~ aujtou`.
6. au{th ejstin hJ megavlh kai; prwvth ejntolhv.
7. pavnte~ ga;r uJmei`~ ei|~ ejste ejn Cristw`/ jIhsou`/.
8. pa`~ oJ pisteuvwn eij~ to;n uiJo;n tou` qeou` e[cei zwh;n aijwvnion.
9. hJ pa`sa povli~ ejxhvlqe ajkouvein to;n ajpovstolon.
10. oujdei;~ pavnta ginwvskei.
11. pa`~ oJ misw`n to;n ajdelfo;n aujtou` oujk ginwvskei th;n ajlhvqeian
tou` qeou`.
12. pa`~ oJ o[clo~ h[rceto pro;~ aujtovn.
13. oiJ a[pistoi oujk ajkouvousi tou;~ lovgou~ tou` profhvtou.
14. oJ ponhro;~ ejlavlei ejn fwnh`/ megavlh/.
15. oJ ajdelfov~ sou ijscurovtero~ mou.

Chapter 26
-mi Conjugation Verbs

26.1 Vocabulary
ajnivsthmi I raise, I stand up, I rise
ajpodivdwmi I give back, I repay
ajpovllumi I destroy (act.); I perish (mid.)
ajsqevneia, hJ weakness
ajfivhmi I send away, I forgive
gnwrivzw I make known
deivknumi I show
divdwmi I give
ejpitivqhmi I put on
i{sthmi I stand, I cause to stand
kaqarov~, -av, -ovn clean, pure
kaqivsthmi I set down, I appoint
makavrio~, -a, -on blessed, happy, fortunate
ojlivgo~, -h, -on few, little
paradivdwmi I hand over, I betray
peiravzw I test, I tempt
peirasmov~, oJ trial, test, temptation
tivqhmi I place, I put, I lay
fhmiv I say
26.2 The -mi Conjugation

The only conjugation of Greek verbs that we have studied so far is the -w
conjugation, so called because their lexical form ends in -w. The over-
whelming majority of Greek verbs fall into this conjugation, but there is
another conjugation, called the -mi conjugation. Although these verbs
are much less common than -w conjugation verbs, several of them do
occur frequently and should be learned. Although older than -w verbs,
most -mi verbs had dropped out of the Greek language by New Testa-
ment times and today only eijmiv remains. Although eijmiv is the most
common -mi verb in the New Testament, we cannot use it as a model
because it is highly irregular. The most important -mi verbs other than
eijmiv are divdwmi, tivqhmi, and i{sthmi. Concentrate on recognizing the
forms of these representative -mi verbs
26.3 Forms of the -mi Conjugation

-mi conjugation verbs differ from -w verbs only in the present, imper-
fect, and second aorist. A main difference is that -mi verbs do not use the
connecting vowel o or e before adding personal endings in these tenses.
For this reason, these verbs are often called athematic verbs. Also, in
the present and imperfect tenses of -mi verbs the stem is reduplicated.
The active personal endings of -mi verbs are slightly different from those
of the w- conjugation, while the middle/passive endings are exactly the
same. The present active indicative and imperfect active indicative end-
ings of -mi verbs are:
Present Active Indicative Imperfect Active Indicative

-mi -men -n -men
-~ -te -~ -te
-si(n) -asi(n) - -san
The paradigms for divdwmi, tivqhmi, and i{sthmi are given below.

Singular
divdwmi tivqhmi i{sthmi
divdw~ tivqh~ i{sth~
divdwsi(n) tivqhsi(n) i{sthsi(n)
-mi Conjugation Verbs 197
Plural
divdomen tivqemen i{stamen
divdote tivqete i{state
didovasi(n) tiqevasi(n) iJsta`si(n)
Inf: didovnai tiqevnai iJstavnai
1) The stem of divdwmi is do, the present stem is dido; the stem
of tivqhmi is qe, the present stem is tiqe; the stem of i{sthmi
is sta, the present stem is iJsta.
2) The stem is reduplicated with i. Note that i{sthmi redupli-

cates with i and has a rough breathing mark and that tivqhmi
reduplicates with i and t rather than q.
3) Singular forms have a long vowel, plural forms have a short

vowel.
Present Middle/Passive Indicative

Singular
divdomai tivqemai i{stamai
divdosai tivqesai i{stasai
divdotai tivqetai i{statai
Plural
didovmeqa tiqevmeqa iJstavmeqa
divdosqe tivqesqe i{stasqe
divdontai tivqentai i{stantai
Inf.: divdosqai tivqesqai i{stasqai
The middle/passive forms use short vowels in both the singular and the
plural.
Imperfect Active Indicative
Singular
ejdivdoun ejtivqhn i{sthn
ejdivdou~ ejtivqei~ i{sth~
ejdivdou ejtivqei i{sth
Plural
ejdivdomen ejtivqemen i{stamen
ejdivdote ejtivqete i{state
ejdivdosan ejtivqesan i{stasan
1) The stem reduplicates as in the present.
2) Singular forms have a long vowel or diphthong, plural forms

have a short vowel.
Imperfect Middle/Passive Indicative

Singular
ejdidovmhn ejtiqevmhn iJstavmhn
ejdivdoso ejtivqeso i{staso
ejdivdoto ejtivqeto i{stato
Plural
ejdidovmeqa ejtiqevmeqa iJstavmeqa
ejdivdosqe ejtivqesqe i{stasqe
ejdivdonto ejtivqento i{stanto
Middle/passive forms have a short vowel in both the singular and plural.
Aorist Active Indicative

Singular
e[dwka e[qhka e[sthsa
e[dwka~ e[qhka~ e[sthsa~
e[dwke(n) e[qhke e[sthse(n)
Plural
ejdwvkamen ejqhvkamen ejsthvsamen
ejdwvkate ejqhvkate ejsthvsate
e[dwkan e[qhkan e[sthsan
Inf.: dou`nai qei`nai sth`nai
1) divdwmi and tivqhmi have a k rather than a s added to the

aorist stem.
2) i{sthmi also has a second aorist forme[sthn. The first aorist

form is transitive (I cause to stand), the second aorist form
is intransitive (I stand). See Mt. 4:5 and Jn. 20:19 in the
Verses for Application section below.
Aorist Middle Indicative

Singular
ejdovmhn ejqevmhn
e[dou e[qou
e[dote e[qete
Plural
ejdovmeqa ejqevmeqa
e[dosqe e[qesqe
e[donto e[qento
Inf.: dovsqai qevsqai
The aorist middle indicative forms of i{sthmi do not appear in the New
Testament.
Aorist Passive Indicative

Singular
ejdovqhn ejtevqhn ejstavqhn
ejdovqh~ ejtevqh~ ejstavqh~
ejdovqh ejtevqh ejstavqh
Plural
ejdovqhmen ejtevqhmen ejstavqhmen
ejdovqhte ejtevqhte ejstavqhte
ejdovqhsan ejtevqhsan ejstavqhsan
Inf.: doqh`nai teqh`nai staqh`nai
All three verbs have a regular first aorist passive.
-mi verb forms other than those listed above are regular enough that you
should be able to recognize them when they appear. You may also con-
sult a principal parts list or a verb chart.

Mt. 4:5 1 Jn. 1:9
Jn. 3:16 1 Jn. 3:16
Jn. 20:19
26.5 Exercises
1. oJ jIhsou`~ e[qhke th;n yuch;n aujtou` peri; hJmw`n.
2. hJ mhth;r devdwke toi`~ uiJoi`~ aujth`~ to;n movnon kalo;n karpovn.
3. oJ qeo;~ ajfh`ken ta;~ aJmartiva~ hJmw`n ejn jIhsou` Cristw`/.
4. ti;~ parevdwke to;n kuvrion;
5. polloi; hjkouvsan ta; rJhvmata tou` kuvriou, ajllÆ ojlivgoi ejpivsteusan

eij~ aujtovn.
6. makavrioi oiJ ptwcoi; tw`/ pneuvmati.
7. oiJ dou`loi i{stasan ejn th`/ oijkia/.
8. oiJ patevre~ didovasi toi`~ uiJoi`~ aujtw`n ajgaqh;n didach;n ejk tw`n
grafw`n.
9. oJ Cristo;~ ajnevsth.
10. oiJ pistoi; e[cousi pollou;~ peirasmou;~ ejn tai`~ zwai`~ aujtw`n.
11. oJ jIhsou`~ ejpoivhse polla; shmeià.
12. oJ kuvrio~ divdwsi hJmi`n aijwvnion zwhvn.
13. e[dwken oJ path;r dw`ra tai`~ qugatravsin aujtou`.
14. to;n profhvthn e[sthsan ejn mevsw/ tw`n grammatevwn.
15. oJ ajpovstolo~ gnwrivsei th;n ajlhvqeian toi`~ o[cloi~.

(page 202 blank)
Chapter 27
The Article
27.1 Vocabulary
ajkolouqevw I follow (with the dative)
ajnqrwpoktovno~, oJ murderer
ajlazoneiva, hJ arrogance, vainglory
bivo~, oJ life
eujloghtov~, -hv, -ovn blessed (used of God and Christ, not of man)
qli`yi~, qlivyew~, hJ affliction, tribulation
qrovno~, oJ throne
kairov~, oJ time, appointed time, season
mevlei it is a care, it is a concern, it matters
(impersonal verb with the dative)
neanivsko~, oJ young man
nikavw I conquer
pavntote always (adv.)
pu`r, purov~, tov fire
savbbaton, tov Sabbath
uJpavrcw I am, I exist
(linking verb, takes a predicate nominative)
fobevomai (pass.) I fear, I am afraid
fuvsi~, fuvsew~, hJ nature
cavrisma, carivsmato~, tov spiritual gift
w{ra, hJ hour, time
27.2 The Greek Article

As we learned earlier, Greek has no indefinite article (English a, an).
Sometimes the indefinite pronoun ti~, ti (a certain) and the numeral
ei|~, miva, e{n (one) are used in the sense of an indefinite article. Since
Greek has no indefinite article, we may refer to the definite articleoJ,
hJ, tovsimply as the article. The Greek article occurs far more fre-
quently (nearly 20,000 times) than any other word in the New Testament
and correct handling of the article, and its absence, is extremely impor-
tant for exegesis. The Greek article derived historically from the demon-
strative pronoun. Originally it was used to point out something, a force
it retained into the Koine period. The main purpose of the article is to
stress the identity of a person, thing, class, or quality. In other words, it
makes someone or something definite. Other uses of the article also will
be presented in this lesson.
27.3 Ordinary Uses of the Greek Article

1) To point out or identify particular persons or things. Example: oiJ
ajpovstoloi ejkhvrusson to;n eujaggevlion (The apostles were preach-
ing the Gospel).
2) With proper nouns. Unlike in English, the Greek article is frequently

used with proper names. Examples: oJ jIhsou`~, oJ Pevtro~, oJ Pau`lo~.
3) With abstract nouns. Also unlike in English, the Greek article is

used with abstract nouns when the desire is to firm up a quality,
or to define it more distinctly. Example: ginwvskomen th;n ajlhvqeian
(We know the truth, i.e. Gods truth as revealed in Christ).
4) With generic nouns. The article is used to distinguish one class of

objects from another. Example: oiJ a[ndre~, ajgapa`te ta;~ gunai`ka~
(Husbands, love your wivesEph. 5:25).
5) With pronouns. See Chapter 7 on the use of the article with aujtov~.
See Chapter 8 on the use of the article with demonstrative pronouns.
The Article 205
6) With adverbs and other parts of speech, as a substantiver. The ar-

ticle can turn many parts of speech, e.g., adverbs into a noun. Ex-
ample: ajpo; tou` nuvn (From now on); mh; ou\n merimnhvshte eij~
th;n au[rion . . . (Dont worry about tomorrow . . .Mt. 6:34).
7) With infinitives. See Chapter 18 on the use of the article with infini-
tives.
8) Previous reference. The article may be used to point out something

introduced earlier. Example: mh; duvnatai hJ pivsti~ sw`sai aujtovn;
(That faith cannot save him, can it?) Faith here refers to a type
of faith introduced earlier.Jas. 2:14).
9) The article can also be used substantivally. Example: mh; ajgapa`te

to;n kovsmon mhde; ta; ejn tw`/ kovsmw/ (Do not love the world, nor the
things in the world1 Jn. 2:15).
27.4 Special Uses of the Article

1) The article is sometimes used with the force of a possessive pro-
noun, when possession is implied. Example: oJ qeo;~ ajpevsteilon
to;n uiJo;n eij~ to;n kovsmon (God sent his Son into the world).
2) The article can function like a relative pronoun. Example: oJ lovgo~ oJ

tou` staurou` (The word which is of the cross1 Cor. 1:18).
3) The article helps distinguish the subject and the predicate nomina-
tive in a sentence with a linking verb. If only one substantive has the
article, it is the subject and the other substantive is the predicate
nominative. Example: oJ qeo;~ ajgavph ejstivn (God is love). In this
example, God has the article and is therefore the subject of the
sentence. If both substantives have the article, they are interchange-
able as to subject and predicate nominative. Example: hJ aJmartiva
ejsti;n hJ ajnomiva (Sin is lawlessness OR Lawlessness is sin
1 Jn. 3:4).
4) When two nouns are joined by kaiv. More than 200 years ago an
Englishman named Granville Sharp formulated a rule which bears
his name. The Sharp rule basically states that when two nouns, or
other substantives (substantival adjectives and participles) of the same
case that are not proper nouns (Paul, Peter, James, etc.), and that
are describing a person, are joined by the conjunction kaiv and the
first noun is preceded by the article, and the second noun is not, both
nouns are referring to the same person. It is important to note that
Sharps rule applies only to personal nouns and it is absolutely valid
for singular nouns only. It may also apply to plurals if the context so
warrants. So, according to Sharps rule, oJ profhvth~ kai; oJ maqhthv~
refers to two different people, whereas oJ profhvth~ kai; maqhthv~
refers to one and the same person. Consider Titus 2:13: tou` megavlou
qeou` kai; swth`ro~ hJmw`n jIhsou` Crivstou` (our great God and Sav-
ior Jesus Christ.) Here, Paul is applying both nounsGod and
Saviorto Jesus Christ, thereby explicitly affirming the deity of
Christ. It should be noted that neither qeov~ nor swthvr is a proper
noun in Greek. See Eph. 1:3 and 2 Pet. 1:1 in the Verses for Appli-
cation section for other examples of Sharps rule.
27.5 Absence of the Article

It is not absolutely necessary for a noun to have the article in order for it
to be definite. There are times when the meaning of a word is so definite
that the article is not needed. Example: oJ path;r ajpevstalken to;n uiJo;n
swth`ra tou` kovsmou (The Father sent his Son as the Savior of the
world). More often, however, anarthrous nouns (those without the ar-
ticle) emphasize quality rather than identity ( God is lovei.e., God
is characterized by love ). Anarthrous nouns may also show indefinite-
ness (a man, rather than the man). A good rule of thumb is: if the
article is present, the noun is definite; if the article is absent, the noun
may be definite, indefinite, or qualitative.
As a case study, lets consider John 1:1: jEn ajrch`/ h\n oJ lovgo~, kai;
oJ lovgo~ h\n pro;~ to;n qeovn, kai; qeo;~ h\n oJ lovgo~. Is qeov~ indefinite,
definite, or qualitative? If definite, it means that lovgo~ and qeov~ are
interchangeable. In other words, the Word is the God, i.e., God the
Father. If qeov~ is indefinite, then we get: the Word was a Godone
deity among many others. However, if we take qeov~ as qualitative, we
The Article 207
have the best sense: the Word was Godnot that the Word is one God
among many others, not that the Word is God the Father, but that the
Word has the essence, the nature, all the attributes of God the Father,
yet is distinct in person. In brief, what the Father is, the Word is. This
interpretation preserves the deity of Christ without blurring the distinc-
tion between Father and Son.

Mt. 8:20 Gal. 5:24 1 Tim 6:10
Mk. 1:15 Eph. 1:3 Tit. 2:13
Acts 23: 1, 3, 5, 6 Eph. 2:8 1 Jn. 4:16
2 Cor. 5:16 1 Tim. 3:13
(page 208 blank)
Appendices
(page 210 blank)
General Rules of Accent
G reek has three accents: the acute ( v ), the circumflex ( ` ), and the
grave ( ; ). Only one of the last three syllables of a Greek word may
be accented. These syllables are: the ultima (last syllable), the penult
(next to last syllable), and the antepenult (third from the last syllable).
The general rules of accent are:
1) The acute accent

a) May stand on the ultima, the penult, or the antepenult:
karpov~, lovgo~, a[nqrwpo~.
b) May stand on either a short or a long syllable: tovpo~, oi[ko~.
c) May not stand on the antepenult when the ultima is long:
a[nqrwpo~, but ajnqrwvpou.
2) The circumflex accent

a) May stand on either the ultima or the penult: dou`lo~, uiJou`.
b) May stand only on a long syllable: ou|to~, but not to`po~.
c) May not stand on the penult if the ultima is long: dou`lo~,
but douvlou.
d) Must stand on an accented long penult before a short ultima:
dou`lo~, but not douvlo~.
3) The grave accent

a) May stand only on the ultima.
b) May stand on either a short or long syllable
c) An acute accent on the ultima changes to a grave when fol-
lowed by another word without any intervening punctuation,
unless the word immediately following is an enclitic: uiJov~,
but oJ uiJo;~ tou` profhvtou.
212 General Rules of Accent
4) Noun accent
The Greek noun has persistent accent, meaning that a nouns accent
remains on the same syllable as in the nominative singular, as nearly as
the general rules of accent permit. Of course, there are exceptions!!
5) Verb accent
The Greek verb has recessive accent, meaning that the accent will stand
as far from the ultima as the general rules of accent permit. Regarding
contract verbs, if the first of the two vowels to be contracted has an acute
before contraction, the resulting syllable will have a circumflex: ajgapavw
ajgapw`; krinevwkrinw`. If any other syllable is accented before con-
traction occurs, the accent will remain the same after contraction:
ejlavle~ejlavlei; plhroevtwsanplhrouvtwsan.
6) Proclitics and Enclitics

Proclitics are words that lean on the following word so closely
that they ordinarily do no take an accent of their own. The proclitics
include:
a) The article forms oJ, hJ, oiJ, aij

b) The negative particle ouj
c) The prepositions eij~, ejn, ejk
d) The conjunctions eij and wJ~
Enclitics are words that lean on the preceding word so closely
that, under certain circumstances, they lose their accent entirely or
have it transferred to the preceding word. The enclitics include:
a) The present indicative of eijmiv, except for the second person

singular.
b) The unemphatic forms of the first and second person singu-
lar forms of the personal pronoun in the genitive, ablative,
dative, locative, and instrumental cases (mou, moi, me, sou,
soi, se).
c) The indefinite pronoun ti~.
Observe the following rules for accenting enclitics:

General Rules of Accent 213
a) An enclitic retains its accent when it begins a sentence or

clause: ejsme;n ajdelfoiv.
b) The word before an enclitic does not change an acute on the
ultima to a grave: ajdelfov~ mou.
c) If a word proceeding an enclitic has an acute on the antepe-
nult or a circumflex on the penult, it takes an additional
acute on the ultima: oJ oi\kov~ mou.
d) An enclitic of two syllables retains its own accent when it
follows a word that has an acute on the penult or a circum-
flex on the ultima: oJ lovgo~ ejsti;n ponhrov~; oJ uiJo;~ tou`
qeou` ejsti;n ajgaqov~.
e) An enclitic of one syllable loses its accent when it follows a
word that has an acute on the penult or a circumflex or an
acute on the ultima: oJ lovgo~ mou; tou` qeou` mou.
f) An enclitic or a proclitic which precedes another enclitic
takes an ultima on the acute: ei[~ me; oJ path;r mouv ejsti
didavskalo~.
(page 214 blank)
Glossary of Grammar Terms
ABLATIVE CASEthe case of separation; shows movement away from.
ABSOLUTEa word or phrase standing independently and having no

grammatical relationship to the rest of the sentence. It occurs most often
in the genitive case.
ACCUSATIVE CASEthis case is most often used as the direct object

of the verb. It indicates extension, limitation, goal, or motion toward. It
is called the objective case in English.
ACTIVE VOICEdescribes the subject as performing the action of a

verb.
ADJECTIVEa word used to modify or describe a noun or pronoun.

Adjectives can also be used substantivally, i. e., to take the place of
nouns.
ADVERBa word that modifies or describes a verb, adjective, or an-

other adverb by indicating quantity, time, place, intensity, and manner.
When modifying a verb an adverb tells when, where, or in what manner
an action is performed.
ALPHA PRIVATIVEan alpha prefixed to a Greek word, thereby mak-

ing it negative.
ANARTHROUSlacking the definite article.
ANTECEDENTthe substantive (sometimes only implied) that a pro-

noun stands in place of.
216 Glossary of Grammar Terms
AORIST TENSEviews the action of a verb in summary, as a whole.
APODOSISthe conclusion of a conditional sentence, i. e., the then

clause of an if . . . then sentence.
ARTICULARhaving the definite article.
ASPECTanother way of describing the kind of action of a verb.
ATTRACTIONsometimes the case of a relative pronoun is attracted

to the case of its antecedent, even though its function would normally
dictate that it be placed in a different case.
ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVEan adjective that attributes a quality to a

person or thing.
AUGMENTthe prefixation of an epsilon to a Greek verb or the length-

ening of the initial vowel of a Greek verb to indicate past tense.
AUXILIARY (HELPING) VERBa verb (e.g, can, have, will)

that combines with another verb to express tense, voice, mood, etc.
CARDINAL NUMBERSnumbers indicating sequence: one, two, three,

etc.
CASEthe form, or inflected endings, of a substantive which shows

how it functions within a sentence.
CLAUSEa group of words which contains a subject and a conjugated

verb. Main clauses can stand alone as complete sentences; subordinate
clauses are attached to a main clause by a subordinating conjunction or a
relative pronoun.
COMPARISONthe use of different forms of adjectives and adverbs to

allow comparison of two (comparative degree) or more (superlative de-
gree) things or actions.
CONDITIONa sentence containing an if clause, followed by a then

clause.
CONJUGATIONthe presentation of the inflected forms of a verb in a

particular tense, mood, voice, etc.
CONJUNCTIONa part of speech that joins words, phrases, clauses,

and sentences.
COPULAa linking verb (from the Latin word meaning link).
CRASISthe combining of two words into one.
DATIVE CASEthe case of interest and or advantage/disadvantage,

often expressed by means of an indirect object.
DECLENSIONthe grouping together of words which share similar

patterns of endings.
DEFINITE ARTICLEa word modifying a substantive and defining it

as particular or unique - English the.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNa pronoun that points out the par-

ticular thing referred to. In English, this and these are near
demonstratives, while that and those are far demonstratives.
DEPONENTa verb with a middle or passive voice form, but an active

function.
DIPHTHONGtwo vowels pronounced with one sound.
DIRECT DISCOURSEquotation of the exact words of a speaker or

writer.
DIRECT OBJECTa substantive that receives the action of the verb

directly.
ELISIONthe elimination of a vowel for the sake of euphony.
ENCLITICa Greek word that drops its accent under certain circum-
stances and is pronounced together with the preceding word.
FINITE VERBa verb that limits the subject in relation to number and
person.
FUTURE TENSEexpresses a future action or state of being.
GENDERclassification of a word as masculine, feminine, or neuter.
GENITIVE CASEexpresses possession, relationship, quality, or

description.
IDIOMa grammatical construction or expression that is peculiar or

unique to a given language and often cannot be translated literally into
another language.
IMPERATIVE MOODexpresses a command, exhortation or (strong)

request.
IMPERFECT TENSEexpresses continuous action taking place in past

time.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNa pronoun used when the antecedent is un-

known or not specified: someone, something, anyone, anything.
INDICATIVE MOODa verb stating a fact or asking a questioncan

be true or false. It is called the mood of assertion.
INDIRECT DISCOURSEthe words or thoughts of a person are quoted

indirectly.
INDIRECT OBJECTa substantive that receives the object of the verb

indirectly or shows who benefited/did not benefit from the action of the
verb.
INFINITIVEa verbal noun which has characteristics of both nouns

and verbs. Unlike finite verbs, infinitives are not limited by person and/
or number.
INFLECTIONthe change of form that words undergo to indicate case,

gender, tense, mood, voice, number, etc. (endings).
INSTRUMENTAL CASEexpresses agency or means; shows how some-

thing is done.
INTENSIVE PRONOUNa pronoun used to reinforce or emphasize

another pronoun or noun for purposes of emphasis.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNa pronoun used to ask a question:

who? what?
INTRANSITIVE VERBa verb that does not take a direct object.
KOINE GREEKthe common Greek language spoken during New Tes-

tament times.
LEXICAL FORMthe basic form of any Greek word; the form in

which a Greek word is listed in a lexicon or dictionary.
LINEAR ACTIONanother term used to describe continuous or pro-

gressive action.
LINKING VERBa verb that links another word to the subject (is,
was, has been).
LOCATIVE CASEshows location or position.
MAIN (INDEPENDENT) CLAUSEa clause that expresses a com-

plete thought and can stand alone as a sentence.
MIDDLE VOICEpresents the subject as acting upon itself or in its

own interests.
MODIFIERa word that describes or in some way limits another word.
MOODthe manner in which action is perceived/described by the subject.
NOMINATIVE CASEthe case of designation or the naming case,

most often used to indicate the subject of a sentence.
NOUNa word that names a person, place, thing, action, event, or

quality.
NUMBERindicates whether a word is singular or plural.
OBLIQUE CASESall case forms except the nominative and the

vocative.
OPTATIVE MOODexpresses a wish, desire, or prayer.
ORDINAL NUMBERnumbers expressing priority or position: first,

second, third, etc.
PARADIGMa chart of the forms of a verb or substantive, taken as an

example of the conjugation or declension to which it belongs.
PARSINGthe full grammatical description of a word.
PARTICIPLEa verbal adjective that has the characteristics of both

adjectives and verbs.
PARTICLEan unidentified unit of speech not found among the other

parts of speech.
PART OF SPEECHa class of words that distinguishes according to

the kind of idea expressed and the function performed in the sentence,
e.g., adjective, adverb, noun, conjunction, particle, preposition, pro-
noun, verb.
PASSIVE VOICEthe subject is seen as receiving the action of a verb

rather than performing it.
PERFECT TENSEexpresses action completed in the past with results

continuing into the present, from the point of view of the speaker or
writer.
PERIPHRASTIC VERBthe combining of a form of the verb to be

with a participle to form an integrated verbal idea. Periphrastic con-
structions are much more common in English than in Greek.
PERSONa quality of the verb that indicates whether the subject is

speaking (1st person), is being spoken to (2nd person), or is being spoken
about (3rd person).
PERSONAL PRONOUNa word that designates a person or thing: I,

you, her, it.
PHRASEany group of words making a coherent statement but not

necessarily including a verb.
PLUPERFECT TENSEexpresses action completed in the past with

the results existing at some point in past time.
PREDICATE ADJECTIVEan adjective that makes an assertion about

a substantive.
PREDICATE NOMINATIVE a noun or pronoun following a linking

verb and further describing the subject of the verb.
PREPOSITIONa word which helps show the relationship between a

substantive and other words in the sentence.
PRESENT TENSEviews the action of a verb as continuous or in

progress in present time.
PRIMARY (PRINCIPAL) TENSESthe present, future, and perfect

tensestenses that express present and future time.
PROCLITICa word so closely linked to a following word that it has no

accent of its own.
PRONOUNa substantive that takes the place of a noun.
PROTASISthe if clause of a conditional sentence.
RECIPROCAL PRONOUNexpresses mutual action between two or

more persons.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNa pronoun that refers back to the subject as

receiver of the action of a verb.
RELATIVE PRONOUNa pronoun that refers back to a previously

mentioned noun or other substantive (implied or expressed), called its
antecedent. A relative pronoun introduces a subordinate clause, called a
relative clause.
SECONDARY (HISTORICAL) TENSESthe imperfect, aorist, and

pluperfect tensestenses that express past time.
SENTENCEthe expression of a complete thought. It will usually con-

tain at least a subject and a verb.
STEMthat part of a word that precedes any endings.
SUBJECTthe person or thing that performs, or is affected by, the

action of the verb.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOODthe mood of probability or contingency. It

expresses a measure of uncertainty.
SUBORDINATE (DEPENDENT) CLAUSEa clause that does not ex-

press a complete thought and can not stand alone as a sentence.
SUBSTANTIVEany part of speech that acts like a noun, including

most pronouns, adjectives, and participles.
TENSEa quality of verbs that describes the action of the verb, includ-
ing time of action (past, present, future) and kind of action (progressive,
summary, perfected) or state of being.
TRANSITIVE VERBa verb that takes a direct object to complete its

meaning.
VERBa word that expresses state of being (is) or action (make,

do, read).
VOCATIVE CASEdenotes the person or persons addressed.

VOICEa quality of verbs which indicates whether the subject is acting

(active voice), being acted upon (passive voice), or acting on/for itself
(middle voice).
(page 224 blank)
GreekEnglish Vocabulary
ajgaqov~, -hv, -ovn (5) good

ajgapavw (17) I love (place supreme value on)
ajgavph, hJ (4) love
ajgaphtov~, -hv, -ovn (5) beloved
a[ggelo~, oJ (3) messenger, angel
aJgiavzw (22) I set apart, I sanctify
a{gio~, -a, -on (5) holy, set apart (in pl., saints)
ajgoravzw (23) I buy
a[gw (2) I lead
ajdelfov~, oJ (3) brother
ajdikiva, hJ (19) unrighteous act
a[diko~, a[dikon (25) unrighteous, unjust
ai|ma, ai{mato~, tov (15) blood
ai[rw (9) I take up, I take away
aijtevw (17) I ask
aijwvn, aijw`no~, oJ (15) age
aijwvnio~, -on (5) eternal
ajkolouqevw (27) I follow (with dat.)
ajkouvw (2) I hear, I listen to
ajlazoneiva, hJ (27) arrogance, vainglory
ajlhqhv~, -e~ (25) true
ajlhvqeia, hJ (4) truth
ajlhvqino~, -h, -on (25) true
ajllav (10) but (conj., stronger than dev)
ajllhvlwn (24) (of) one another
a[llo~, -h, -o (5) other, another (sometimes of the
same kind)
aJmartavnw (8) I sin
aJmartiva, hJ (4) sin
226 GreekEnglish Vocabulary
aJmartwlov~, oJ (8) sinner

ajmhvn (8) verily, truly, amen (particle)
a[n (22) A particle indicating contingency
or uncertainty (postpositive)
ajnav (6) up, again (prep., with acc.)
ajnabaivnw (13) I go up
ajnaginwvskw (9) I read
ajnavstasi~, ajnastavsew~, hJ (15) resurrection
ajnhvr, ajndrov~, oJ (15) man, male, husband
ajnqrwpoktovno~, oJ (27) murderer
a[nqrwpo~, oJ (3) man, person, human being, mankind
ajnivsthmi (26) I raise, I stand up, I rise
ajnoivgw (8) I open
ajntiv (6) against, instead of, for (exchange),
in place of (prep., with gen.)
ajntivcristo~, oJ (18) antichrist, Antichrist
ajpaggevllw (23) I tell, I proclaim
ajpevrcomai (10) I go away, I depart
a[pisto~, -on (5) unbelieving, faithless
ajpov (6) from, away from (prep., with abl.)
ajpodivdwmi (26) I give back, I repay
ajpoqnh/vskw (11) I die
ajpokrivnomai (10) I answer (takes direct object in dat.)
ajpokteivnw (11) kill
ajpovllumi (26) I destroy (active); I perish (middle)
ajpoluvw (20) I release, I set free
ajpostevllw (7) I send (with a message)
ajpovstolo~, oJ (3) apostle
ajrnevomai (18) I deny
a[rti (25) now (adv.)
a[rto~, oJ (3) bread, loaf
ajrciereuv~, ajrcierevw~, oJ (15) chief priest, high priest
a[rcomai (18) I begin
a[rcw (10) I rule (takes direct object in gen.)
a[rcwn, a[rconto~, oJ (15) ruler
ajsqevneia, hJ (26) weakness
ajsqenhv~, ajsqenev~ (25) weak
ajspavzomai (10) I greet
ajsthvr, ajstevro~ oJ (19) star
GreekEnglish Vocabulary 227
au[rion (25) tomorrow (adv.)

aujtov~, -hv, -ov (7) he, she, it (pron.)
ajfivhmi (26) I send away, I forgive
a[cri (23) until (adv., used as prep., with gen.)
bavllw (9) I throw

baptivzw (9) I immerse, put into
basilikov~, -hv, -ovn (5) royal
basileiva, hJ (4) kingdom
basileuv~, basilevw~, oJ (21) king
bivblion, tov (11) book
bivo~, oJ (27) life
blasfhmevw (19) I blaspheme, I speak against, I slander
blevpw (2) I see
gavr (8) for (conj., causal; postpositive)

gennavw (17) I beget, I give birth to
gevno~, gevnou~, tov (15) offspring, kind, nation, race
gewrgov~, oJ (19) farmer
gh`, hJ (18) earth, land, ground
givnomai (10) I become (linking verb, takes a
predicate nominative rather than a
direct object)
ginwvskw (2) I know
glw`ssa, hJ (4) tongue, language
gnwrivzw (26) I make known
gnw`si~, gnwvsew~, hJ (15) knowledge
grammateuv~, grammatevw~, oJ (15) scribe
grafhv, hJ (4) writing, Scripture
gravfw (2) I write
gunhv, gunaikov~, hJ (15) woman, wife
daimovnion, tov (11) devil

dev (7) but, and, moreover
(conj., postpositive)
dei` (18) it is necessary (impersonal verb;
used with infinitive and the acc.)
deivknumi (26) I show
devka (24) ten
dexiov~, -av, -ovn (19) right, at the right hand

deuvtero~, -a, -on (24) second
devcomai (11) I receive, welcome
dhlovw (17) I show
diav (6) through (prep., with the gen.);
through (agency, abl.), because
of, on account of (acc.)
diavbolo~, oJ (19) devil
diavkono~, oJ or hJ (20) servant, minister, deacon
didavskalo~, oJ (7) teacher
didavskw (2) I teach
didachv, hJ (4) teaching
divdwmi (26) I give
dievrcomai (10) I come/go through
divkaio~, -a, -on (5) righteous, just
dikaiosuvnh, hJ (22) righteousness
diov (22) therefore, for this reason (conj.)
diwvkw (14) I pursue, I persecute
dokevw (23) I think, I suppose
dovxa, hJ (4) glory
doxavzw (9) I glorify
douleuvw (25) I serve (with dat.)
dou`lo~, oJ (3) slave, servant, bondservant
duvnamai (18) I am able, I can (takes a
complementary infinitive)
duvnami~, dunavmew~, hJ (15) power
duvo (24) two
dwvdeka (24) twelve
dw`ron, tov (3) gift
ejavn (22) if (conj., usually used with the

subjunctive)
eJautou`, -h`~, -ou` (24) (of) himself, herself, itself
ejggivzw (16) I come near
ejgeivrw (2) I raise up
ejgwv (7) I (pron.)
e[qno~, e[qnou~, tov (15) nation (in pl., usually, Gentiles)
eij (22) if (conj., used with the indicative)
eijmiv (7) I am (linking verb, takes a predicate

nominative rather than a direct
object)
ei\nai (18) to be (infinitive of eijmiv)
eijrhvnh, hJ (4) peace
eij~ (6) into, to, for, in, with a view towards
(prep., with the acc.)
ei|~, miva, e{n (24) one
eijsevrcomai (10) I come/go into, I enter
ei[te (22) if, whether (conj.)
ejk (6) out of, from (source), because of
(prep., with the abl., ejx before
a vowel)
e{katon (24) one hundred
e{kasto~, -h, -on (5) each, every
ejkei` (21) there (adv.)
ejkei`no~, -h, -on (8) that (pron.)
ejkklhsiva, hJ (4) church, assembly
e[leo~, e[leou~, tov (15) mercy
ejlpivzw (16) I hope
ejlpiv~, ejlpivdo~, hJ (15) hope
ejmautou`, -h`~ (24) (of) myself
ejmov~, -hv, -ovn (24) my, mine
ejn (6) in, on, at among (prep., with
the loc.); with, by means of (instr.)
ejntolhv, hJ (4) commandment
ejnwvpion (20) before (adv., used as prep.,
with gen.)
ejxevrcomai (10) I come/go out of
e[xesti(n) (18) it is lawful (impersonal verb; used
with infinitive and dat.)
ejxousiva, hJ (4) authority
e[xw (22) outside (adv., used as prep.,
with gen.)
eJorthv, hJ (11) feast
ejpaggeliva, hJ (8) promise
ejpaggevllomai (18) I promise
ejperwtavw (25) I ask, I question
ejpiv (6) on, upon, at, over (prep., with the

gen., emphasizes contact); on, upon,
at, by (loc., emphasizes position);
on, upon, to, up to (acc., motion)
ejpiqumiva, hJ strong desire, lust
ejpitivqhmi (26) I put on
eJptav (24) seven
e[rgon, tov (8) work
e[rhmo~, hJ (9) desert, wilderness
e[rcomai (10) I come, go
ejrwtavw (20) I ask, I request
ejsqivw (12) I eat
e[scato~, -h, -on (5) last
e{tero~, -a, -on (5) other, another (usually of different
kind)
e[ti (11) still, yet (adv.)
eJtoimavzw (11) I prepare
e[to~, e[tou~, tov (21) year
eujanggelivzw (22) I proclaim the Gospel, I bring Good
News
eujaggevlion, tov (8) Gospel, Good News
eujquv~ (23) immediately (adv.)
eujlogevw (17) I bless
eujloghtov~, -hv, -ovn (27) blessed (used of God and Christ, not
of man)
euJrivskw (12) I find
eujcaristevw (17) I give thanks
e[cw (2) I have
e{w~ (19) until, while (conj., used as prep.,
with gen.)
zavw (17) live

zhtevw (17) seek
zwhv, hJ (9) life
h[ (25) or, than (conj.)

h[dh (23) now, already (adv.)
hJmei`~ (7) we (pron.)
hJmevra, hJ (4) day
hJmevtero~, -a, -on (24) our
qavlassa, hJ (11) sea

qavnato~, oJ (3) death
qeavomai (18) I see, I notice
qevlema, qelhvmato~, tov (15) will
qeov~, oJ (7) God; god
qerapeuvw (11) I heal
qewrevw (17) I see, I perceive, I behold
qli`yi~, qlivyew~, hJ (27) affliction, tribulation
qrovno~, oJ (27) throne
qugavthr, qugatrov~, hJ (15) daughter
i[dio~, -a, -on (24) his, hers, its, ones own

ijdouv (23) Look! Behold! Here (there) is;
imperative of ei\don
ijdwvn, -ou`sa, -ovn (20) having seen (2nd aorist active
participle of oJravw)
iJerovn, tov (3) temple
iJereuv~, iJerevw~, oJ (15) priest
jIhsou`~, oJ (8) Jesus
iJlasmov~, oJ (19) propitiation; the means by which sins
are forgiven
iJmavtion, tov (23) clothing
i{na (22) that, in order that (conj., usually used
with the subjunctive
i{sthmi (26) I stand, I cause to stand
ijscurov~, -av, -ovn (25) strong
ijcquv~, ijcquvo~, oJ (15) fish
kajgwv (7) and I, I also

kaqarivzw (11) I cleanse, purify
kaqarov~, -av, -ovn (26) clean, pure
kaqeuvdw (21) I sleep, I am dead
kavqhmai (20) I sit down
kaqivsthmi (26) I set down, I appoint
kaqwv~ (21) as, just as (adv.)
kaiv (3) and, also, even (conj.)
kai; . . . kaiv (10) both . . . and
kainov~, -hv, ovn (5) new

kairov~, oJ (27) time, appointed time, season
kakov~, -hv, -ovn (5) bad
kalevw (17) I call
kalov~, -hv, -ovn (5) good
kardiva, hJ (9) heart
karpov~, oJ (3) fruit
katav (6) down from (prep., with the abl.);
down upon, against (gen.);
according to (acc.)
katabaivnw (12) I go down
katevrcomai (10) I come/go down
katoikevw (21) I inhabit, I dwell
keleuvw (21) I command
kefalhv, hJ (7) head
khruvssw (9) I proclaim, I herald
kleivw (18) I shut, I close
koinwniva, hJ (23) fellowship
kopiavw (21) I work, I labor
kovsmo~, oJ (9) world
kravzw (21) I cry out
krivnw (9) I judge
krivsi~, krivsew~, hJ (15) judgment
kruptov~, -hv, -ovn (21) hidden, concealed, secret
kuvrio~, oJ (3) master, lord, Lord
kwfov~, -hv, -ovn (21) deaf, mute
lalevw (17) I say, I speak

lambavnw (2) I take, I receive
laov~, oJ (8) people
levgw (2) I say, I speak
leivpw (13) I leave
livqo~, oJ (3) stone
logivzomai (20) I account, I reckon
lovgo~, oJ (3) word
loipov~, -hv, -ovn (25) remaining, rest
to; loipovn/tou` loipou` finally, henceforth, from now on
luvw (2) I loose, I destroy
maqhthv~, oJ (4) disciple

makavrio~, -a, -on (26) blessed, happy, fortunate
mavllon (25) more (adv.)
manqavnw (2) I learn
marturevw (17) I bear witness
marturiva, hJ (22) witness, testimony
mavrtu~, mavrturo~, oJ (19) witness
mevga~, megavlh, mevga (25) large, great
mevlei (27) it is a care, it is a concern, it matters
(impersonal verb used with the
dative)
mevllw (18) I am about to (followed by
complementary infinitive
me;n . . . dev (10) on the one hand . . . on the other
hand
mevnw (7) I remain, I abide
mevso~, -h, -on (22) middle
ejn mevsw/ in the midst
ejk mevsou from among
Messiva~, oJ (4) Messiah
metav (6) with (prep., with the gen.);
after (acc.)
metabaivnw (18) I leave, I move
mhv (20) not (negative particle, used with
moods other than the indicative and
with participles and infinitives)
mhdev (20) and not, not, not even (particle)
mhde; . . . mhdev (20) neither . . . nor
mhdeiv~, mhdemiva, mhdevn (24) no one, nothing (usually with
moods other than the indicative
mhkevti (20) no longer (adv.)
mhvthr, mhtrov~, hJ (15) mother
mikrov~, -av, -ovn (5) small, little
misevw (25) I hate
misqov~, oJ (20) wages
movno~, -h, -on (5) alone, only
mwrov~, -av, -ovn (20) foolish
naov~, tov (3) temple, especially the inner

sanctuary and in the sense of the
believers body as the temple of God
neaniva~, oJ (4) young man
neanivsko~, oJ (27) young man
nekrov~, -av, -ovn (5) dead
nikavw (27) I conquer
nomivzw (21) I think, I suppose
novmo~, oJ (3) law
nu`n (11) now (adv.)
nuvx, nuktov~, hJ (15) night
oJdov~, hJ (3) road, way

o{qen (25) where, from where (adv.)
oi\da (18) I know (perfect tense form with
present tense meaning)
oijkiva, hJ (22) house
oi\ko~, oJ (3) house, household
ojlivgo~, -h, -on (26) little, few
o{lo~, -h, -on (22) all, whole (usually attributive in
usage, but always appears in the
predicate position)
o{moio~, -a, -on (21) like, similar to (used with dat.)
oJmologevw (18) I confess
o[noma, ojnovmato~, tov (15) name
o{pou (22) where (adv.)
o{pw~ (22) that, in order that (with the
subjunctive)
oJravw (17) I see
o[ro~, o[rou~, tov (20) mountain
o{~, h{, o{n (24) who, which, what
o{so~, -h, -on (22) as much as, as great as
o{sti~, h{ti~, o{ti (24) who, whoever, whatever
o{tan (22) when, whenever (particle, used with
the subjunctive)
o{ti (8) because; that (conj.); may also mark
the beginning of direct discourse
ouj (8) not (negative particle; oujk before
smooth breathing, oujc before rough
breathing)
oujdev (10) and not, nor, not even

oujde; . . . oudev (10) neither . . . nor
oujdeiv~, oujdemiva, oujdevn (24) no one, nothing (usually with
indicative)
ou[keti (10) no longer (adv.)
ou[n (11) therefore, then, accordingly (adv.);
postpositive
ou[pw (10) not yet (adv.)
oujranov~, oJ (9) heaven (often used in the pl. in
the N. T.)
ou\~, wjtov~, tov (23) ear
ou|to~, au{th, tou`to (8) this (pron.)
ou{tw~ (11) thus, so, in this manner (adv.)
oujciv (7) not (strengthened form of ouj)
ojfeivlw (19) I owe, I ought, I am obligated (often
followed by an infinitive)
ojfqalmov~, oJ (19) eye
o[clo~, oJ (3) crowd, multitude
paidivon, tov (22) child

palaiov~, -av, -ovn (20) old (never used of persons)
pavlin (5) again (adv.)
pavntote (27) always (adv.)
parav (6) from (the side of); prep., with the
abl.; before, beside, by the side of
(position), with the loc.; beside,
beyond, along, to the side (motion),
with the acc.)
parabolhv hJ (4) parable
paravgw (25) I pass by, I pass away
paradivdwmi (26) I hand over, I betray
parakalevw (17) I exhort, I comfort, I urge
paravklhto~, oJ (19) advocate, paraclete
pa`~, pa`sa, pa`n (25) every; all; whole
pavscw (13) I suffer
pathvr, patrov~, oJ (15) father
Pau`lo~, oJ (7) Paul
peivqw (12) I persuade
peiravzw (26) I test, I tempt
peirasmov~, oJ (26) trial, test, temptation

pevmpw (2) I send
pevnte (24) five
periv (6) about, concerning (prep., with
the gen.); about, around (acc.)
peripatevw (17) I walk about, I live
Pevtro~, oJ (7) Peter
pivnw (22) I drink
pivptw (13) I fall
pisteuvw (11) I believe, I have faith
pivsti~, pivstew~, hJ (15) faith
pistov~, -hv, -ovn (5) faithful, believing
plh`qo~, plhvqou~, tov (21) crowd, people
plhrovw (17) I fill, I fulfill
ploivon, tov (11) boat
plouvsio~, -a, -on (20) rich
pneu`ma, pneuvmato~, tov (15) spirit, Spirit
poievw (17) I do, I make
povli~, povlew~, hJ (15) city
poluv~, pollhv, poluv (25) much, many
ponhrov~, -av, -ovn (5) evil
poreuvomai (10) I come, I go, I proceed
potamov~, oJ (3) river
pou` (25) where, whither
pouv~, podov~, tov (23) foot
pra`gma, pravgmato~, tov (25) thing, matter, deed, event
pravssw (11) I do, perform, practice
presbuvtero~, -a, -on (7) older, elder
privn (18) before (adv.)
prov (6) before (time/space; prep., with abl.),
in front of
provbaton, tov (21) sheep
prov~ (6) for, for the sake of (prep., with
gen.); at (loc.); to toward, with, for,
for the purpose of (acc.)
prosevrcomai (10) I come/go to, I come/go towards
proseuvcomai (12) I pray
proskunevw (23) I worship (usually used with dat.)
provswpon, tov (20) face
profhvth~, oJ (4) prophet

prw`to~, -h, -on (5) first
ptwkov~, -hv, -ovn (20) poor
pu`r, puvro~, tov (27) fire
pw`~ (19) how? (adv.)
rJh`ma, rJhvmato~, tov (15) word, saying
savbbaton, tov (27) Sabbath

savrx, sarkov~, hJ (15) flesh
Satana`~, oJ (4) Satan
seautou`, seauth`~ (24) (of) yourself
shmeivon, tov (20) sign
shvmeron (25) today (adv.)
skavndalon, tov (19) stumbling block, cause for stumbling
skotiva, hJ (11) darkness
skovto~, skovtou~, tov (20) darkness
sov~, shv, sovn (24) your, yours (sing.)
sofov~, -hv, -ovn (5) wise
speivrw (23) I sow
spevrma, spevrmato~, tov (23) seed, offspring
splavgcnon, tov (18) heart, affection (in pl., literally
innards, bowels, guts)
staurov~, oJ (11) cross
staurovw (17) I crucify
stavcu~, stavcuo~, oJ (20) head of grain, wheat
stovma, stovmato~, tov (15) stomach
suv (7) you (sing., pron.)
suvn (6) with, together with (prep.,
with instr.)
sunavgw (9) I gather together
sunagwghv, hJ synagogue
sunevrcomai (10) I come/go together with
sfavzw (18) I slay, I murder
sw/vzw (9) I save, I deliver
sw`ma, swvmato~, tov (15) body
swthvr, swth`ro~, oJ (15) savior, Savior
swthriva, hJ (20) salvation
taravssw (19) I disturb, I trouble, I stir up

tev (23) and (conj., weaker in force than kaiv)
tevknon, tov (8) child
tevleio~, -a, -on (25) complete, perfect
tevlo~, tevlou~, tov (21) end
telwvnh~, oJ (4) tax collector
tevssare~, tevssara (24) four
tevtarto~, -h, -on (24) fourth
threvw (17) I keep
tivqhmi (26) I place, I put, I lay
timavw (17) I honor
tiv~, tiv (24) who? what?
ti~, ti (24) someone, something, anyone,
anything, a certain one (pron.)
toiou`to~, toiauvth, toiou`ton (24) such, of such kind
tovpo~, oJ (9) place
tovte (11) then (adv.)
trei`~, triva (24) three
trivto~, -h, -on (24) third
tuflov~, -hv, -ovn (18) blind
u{dwr, u{dato~, tov (15) water

uiJov~, oJ (3) son
uJmei`~ (7) you (pron.)
uJmevtero~, -a, -on (24) your (pl.)
uJpavgw (22) I go away
uJpavrcw (27) I am, I exist (linking verb, takes a
predicate nominative)
uJpevr (6) in behalf of, instead of, for (prep.,
with abl.); above, over, beyond
(acc.)
uJpov (6) by (agency; prep., with the abl.);
under (acc.)
faivnw (19) I shine, I cause to shine

fanerovw (17) I reveal, I make manifest
fevrw (2) I bear, bring
fhmiv (26) I say
filevw (17) I love, I like
fobevomai (27) I fear, I am afraid (passive voice)

fovbo~, oJ (19) fear
frovnimo~, -on (21) prudent
fulavssw (21) I guard, I keep
fuvsi~, fuvsew~, hJ (27) nature
fwnhv, hJ (9) voice, sound
fw`~, fwtov~, tov (19) light
carav, hJ (8) joy

caivrw (23) I rejoice
cavrin (18) for the sake of, by reason of (adv.,
used as prep., with the gen.)
cavri~, cavrito~, hJ (15) grace
cavrisma, carivsmato~, tov (27) spiritual gift
ceivr, ceirov~, hJ (19) hand
cri`sma, crivsmato~, tov (18) annointing
Cristov~, oJ (8) Christ
cronivzw (21) I delay, I tarry
yeuvdomai (19) I lie, I deceive

yeu`do~, yeuvdou~, tov (18) lie
yeuvsth~, oJ (19) liar
yhlafavw (17) I touch
yuchv, hJ (23) soul, self, life
w|de (22) here, hither (adv.)
w{ra, hJ (27) time, hour
wJ~ (22) as, about (comparative particle)
w{ste (18) so, that, therefore (conj.)
(page 240 blank)
Principal Parts of Greek Verbs
Present Future Aorist Perfect Perfect Aorist
Active Active Active Active Mid./Pass. Passive
ajgapavw ajgaphvsw hjgavphsa hjgavphka hjgavphmai hjgaphvqhn
aJgiavzw hJgivasa hJgivasmai hJgiavsqhn
ajgoravzw ajgoravsw hjgovrasa hjgoravsqhn
a[gw a[xw h[gagon h\ka h\gmai h[cqhn
ai[rw ajrw` h\ra h\rka h\rmai h[rqhn
aijtevw aijthvsw h[/thsa h[/thka h[/thmai hj/thvqhn
ajkolouqevw ajkolouqhvsw hjkolouvqhsa hjkolouqhvka
ajkouvw ajkouvsw h[kousa ajkhvkoa h[kousmai hjkouvsqhn
aJmartavnw aJmarthvsw hJmavrthsw hJmavrthka hJmavrthmai hJmarthvqhn

(h[marton)
ajnabaivnw ajnabhvsomai ajnevbhn ajnabevbhka

ajnaginwvskw ajnevgwn ajnagnwvsqhn
ajnivsthmi ajnasthvsw ajnevsthsa

(ajnevsthn)
ajnoivgw ajnoivxw ajnevw/xa ajnevw/ga ajnevw/gmai ajnewv/cqhn

(hjnevw/xa) (hjnevw/mai) (hjnewv/cqhn)
(h[noixa) (hjnoivcqhn)
ajpaggevllw ajpaggelw` ajphvggeila ajphggevlhn
ajpevrcomai ajpeleuvsomai ajph`lqòn ajpelhvluqa
ajpodivdwmi ajpodwvsw ajpevdwka ajpodevdwka ajpodevdomai ajpedovqhn
ajpoqnhv/skw ajpoqanou`mai ajpevqanon
ajpokrivnomai ajpekrinavmhn ajpekrivqhn
ajpokteivnw ajpektenw` ajpevkteina ajpektavnqhn

ajpovllumi ajpolevsw ajpwvlesa ajpolwvleka

(ajpolw`) (ajpovlwla)
ajpoluvw ajpoluvsw ajpevlusa ajpolevlumai ajpeluvqhn
ajpostevllw ajpostelw` ajpevsteila ajpevstalka ajpevstalmai ajpestavlhn
ajrnevomai ajrnhvsomai hjrnhvsamhn h[rnhmai
a[rcw a[rxomai hjrxavmhn
ajspavzomai hjspasavmhn
ajfivhmi ajfhvsw ajfh`ka ajfei`ka ajfei`mai ajfeivqhn

(ajfevqhn)
bavllw balw` e[balon bevblhka bevblhmai ejblhvqhn
baptivzw baptivsw ejbavptisa bebavptismai ejbaptivsqhn
blasfhmevw blasfhmhvsw ejblasfhvmhsa

blevpw blevyw e[bleya
gennavw gennhvsw ejgevnnhsa gegevnnhka gegvennhmai ejgennhvqhn
givnomai genhvsomai ejgenovmhn gevgona gegevnhmai ejgenhvqhn
ginwvskw gnwvsomai e[gnwn e[gnwka e[gnwsmai ejgnwvsqhn
gnwrivzw gnwrivsw ejgnwvrisa ejgnwrivsqhn
gravfw gravyw e[graya gevgrafa gevgrammai ejgravfhn
deivknumi deivxw e[deixa devdeica devdeigmai ejdeivcqhn
devcomai devxomai ejdexavmhn devdegmai ejdevcqhn
dhlovw dhlwvsw ejdhvlwsa dedhvlwmai ejdhlwvqhn
didavskw didavxw ejdivdaxa ejdidavcqhn
divdwmi dwvsw e[dwka devdwka devdomai ejdovqhn

dievrcomai dieleuvsoami dih`lqon dielhvluqa
diwvkw diwvxw ejdivwxa dedivwgmai ejdiwvcqhn
dokevw dovxw e[doxa
doxavzw doxavsw ejdovxasa dedovxaka dedovxasmai ejdoxavsqhn
douleuvw douleuvsw ejdouleuvsa dedouleuvka
duvnamai dunhvsomai hjdunhvqhn
ejggivzw ejggiw` h[ggisa h[ggika
ejgeivrw ejgerw` h[geira ejghvgermai ejgevrqhn
eijmiv e[somai
eijsevrcomai eijseleuvsomai eijsh`lqon eijselhvluqa
ejlpivzw ejlpiw` h[lpisa h[lpika

ejxevrcomai ejxeleuvsomai ejxh`lqon ejxelhvluqa
ejpaggevlomai ejphggeilavmhn ejphvggelmai
ejperwtavw ejperethvsw ejphrwvthsa ejphrwthvqhn
ejpitivqhmi ejpiqhvsw ejpetivqhmi ejpitevqeika ejpitevqeimai ejpetevqhn
e[rcomai ejleuvsomai h\lqon ejlhvluqa
ejrwtavw ejrwthvsw hjrwthvsa
ejsqivw favgomai e[fagon
eJtoimavzw eJtoimavsw hJtoivmasa hJtoivmaka hJtoivmasmai hJtoimavsqhn
eujaggelivzw eujaggelivsw eujhggevlisa eujhggevlismai hjhggelivsqhn
eujlogevw eujloghvsw eujlovghsa eujlovghka eujlovghmai eujloghvqhn
euJrivskw euJrhvsw eu|ron e{urhka eu{rhmai euJrevqhn

eujcaristevw eujcarivsthsa eujcaristhvqhn
e[cw e{xw e[scon e[schka
zavw zhvsomai e[zhsa

(zhvsw)
zhtevw zhthvsw ejzhvthsa ejzhthvqhn
qeavomai ejqeasavmhn teqevamai ejqeavqhn
qerapeuvw qerapeuvsw ejqeravpeusa teqeravpeuka teqeravpeumai ejqerapeuvqhn
qewrevw qewrhvsw ejqewvrhsa
i{sthmi sthvsw e[sthsa e{sthka e{stamai ejstavqhn

(e[sthn)
kaqarivzw kaqariw` ejkaqavrisa kekaqavrismai ejkaqarivsqhn

kaqeuvdw kaqeudhvsw
kavqhmai kaqhvsomai
kaqivsthmi katasthvsw katevsthsa kaqevsthka kaqevstamai katestavqhn

(katevsthn)
kalevw kalevsw ejkavlesa kevklhka kevklhmai ejklhvqhn
katabaivnw katabhvsomai katevbhn katabevbhka
kataoikevw
katevrcomai kateleuvsomai kath`lqon katelhvluqa
keleuvw keleuvsw ejkeleuvsa kekevleuka kekevleusmai ejkeleuvsqhn
khruvssw khruvxw ejkhvruxa kekhvruca kekhvrugmai ejkhruvcqhn
kleivw kleivsw e[kleisa kevkleismai ejkleivsqhn
kopiavw kopiavsw
kravzw kravxw e[kraxa kevkraga
krivnw krinw` e[krina kevkrika kevkrimai ejkrivqhn
lalevw lalhvsw ejlavlhsa lelavlhka lelavlhmai ejlalhvqhn
lambavnw lhvmyomai e[labon ei[lhfa ei[lhmmai ejlhvmfqhn
levgw ejrw` ei\pon ei[rhka ei[rhmai ejrrevqhn
leivpw leivyw e[lipon levloipa levleimmai ejleivfqhn
logivzomai logivsomai ejlogivsqhn
luvw luvsw e[lusa levluka levlumai ejluvqhn
manqavnw maqhvsomai e[maqon memavqhka
marturevw marturhvsw ejmartuvrhsa memartuvrhka memartuvrhmai ejmarturhvqhn
mevllw mellhvsw
mevnw menw` e[meina memevnhka
metabaivnw metabhvsomai metevbhn metabevbhka
misevw mishvsw ejmivshsa memivska memivshmai
nikavw nikhvsw ejnivkhsa nenivkhka
nomivzw nomivsw ejnovmisa nenovmika nenovmismai ejnomivsqhn
oi\da eijdhvsw h[dein oi\da
oJmologevw oJmologhvsw wJmolovghsa
oJravw o[yomai ei\don eJwvraka w[fqhn
ojfeivlw
paravgw paravxw
paradivdwmi paradwvsw parevdwka paradevdwka paradevdomai paredovqhn

parakalevw parakalevsw parakavlesa parakevklhka parakevklomai pareklhvqhn
pavscw peivsomai e[paqon pevponqa
peivqw peivsw e[peisa pevpoiqa pevpeismai ejpeivsqhn
peiravzw peiravsw ejpeivrasa pepeivraka pepeivrasmai ejpeiravsqhn
pevmpw pevmyw e[pemya pevpomfa pevpemmai ejpevmfqhn
peripatevw peripathvsw peripavthsa eriepathvqhn
pivnw pivomai e[pion pevpwka pevpomai ejpovqhn
pivptw pesou`mai e[peson pevptwka

(e[pevsa)
pisteuvw pisteuvsw ejpivsteusa pepivsteuka pepivsteumai ejpisteuvqhn
plhrovw plhrwvsw ejplhvrwsa peplhvrwka peplhvrwmai ejplhrwvqhn
poievw poihvsw ejpoivhsa pepoivhka pepoivhmai ejpoihvqhn

poreuvomai poreuvsomai pepovreumai ejporeuvqhn
pravssw pravxw e[praxa pevpraca pevpragmai
prosevrcomai proseleuvsomai prosh`lqon proselhvluqa
proseuvcomai proseuvxomai proshuxavmhn
proskunevw proskunhvsw prosekuvnhsa
speivrw sperw` e[speira e[sparmai ejspavrhn
staurovw staurwvsw ejstauvrwsa ejstauvrwka ejstauvrwmai ejstaurwvqhn
sunavgw sunavxw sunhvgagon sunh`gmai sunhvcqhn
sunevrcomai suneleuvsomai sunh`lqon sunelhvluqa
sfavzw sfavxw e[sfaxa e[sfagmai ejsfavghn
swv/zw swvsw e[swsa sevswka sevsw/smai ejswvqhn

taravssw taravxw ejtavraxa tetavragmai ejtaravcqhn
threvw thrhvsw ejthvrhsa tethvrhka tethvrhmai ejthrhvqhn
tivqhmi qhvsw e[qhka tevqeika tevqeimai ejtevqhn
timavw timhvsw ejtivmhsa tetivmhka tetivmhmai ejtimhvqhn
upavgw uJpavxw uJphvgagon uJph`gmai uJphvcqhn
uJpavrcw uJpavrxomai uJphrxavmhn
faivnw fanhvsomai e[fana (ejfavnhn) ejfavnhn
fanerovw fanerwvsw ejfanevrwsa pefanevrwka pefanevrwmai ejfanerwvqhn
fevrw oi[sw h[negka ejnhvnoca ejnhvnekmai hjnevcqhn

(h[negkon)
fhmiv e[fh
filevw filhvsw ejfivlhsa pefivlhka tefivlhmai ejfilhvqhn
fobevomai ejfobhvqhn
fulavssw fulavxw ejfuvlaxa pefuvlaca pefuvlagmai ejfulavcqhn
caivrw carhvsomai ejcavrhn
cronivzw cronivsw
yeuvdomai yeuvsomai ejyeusavmhn
yhlafavw ejyhlavfhsa
Index
Accents passive indicative, 97
introduction to, 8-9, 211 uses of aorist tense, 92-93
on enclitics and proclitics, 212-213 Deponent verbs in aorist tense, 72
on nouns, 24, 212 Article
on verbs, 16, 212 absence of, 206-207
Accusative of general reference, 130 feminine forms, 32
Active voice, 13 introduction to, 25-26, 204
Adjectives masculine and neuter forms, 26
definition of, 36 uses of, 204-206
irregular, 190-191 Aspect (kind of action), 13
of first and second declensions, Athematic verbs, 196
36-37 Attributive position, 38
of third declension, 192 Attraction, 181
uses of, 38-40 Augment, 76, 88, 116
Adverbs, 40 Breathing marks, 6-8
Agency, 64-65 Case
Agreement of subject and verb, 16 ablative, 21
Alphabet, 1-3 accusative, 22
Alpha privative, 193 dative, 21
Amalgamation, 82 definition of, 20-21
Antecedent, 50, 180 genitive, 21
Aorist tense instrumental, 22
first aorist locative, 21
active indicative, 88-89, 91 nominative, 21
middle indicative, 89-90 vocative, 22
passive indicative, 96 Clauses, 12
introduction to, 88 Comparison of Adjectives, 192-193
irregular aorist forms, 91-92 Comparison of adverbs, 193
second aorist Complement, 39, 54
active indicative, 90-91 Compound verbs, 45, 76
middle indicative, 91 Connecting vowels, 77-78, 89-90,
113
256 Index
Conditional sentences, 166-168 future indicative of eijmiv, 85

Conjugation irregular formation of, 83
definition of, 17 middle indicative, 84
of zavw, 125 passive indicative, 97-98
of oi\da, 133 uses of, 84-85
-mi conjugation, 17, 195-200 Gender, 22
-w conjugation, 17 Genitive absolute, 156-157
Conjunctions Granville Sharp Rule, 206
definition of, 60 Imperative mood
uses of kaiv, oudev, me;n . . . dev, 71 aspect/kind of action in 175
o{ti vs. gavr, 61 forms of, 172-174
Consonants, 5-6 introduction to, 171-172
Contract verbs, 119-124 uses of, 175
rules of contraction, 120-121 Imperfect tense
Coronis, 7 active indicative, 76-77
Crasis, 7 introduction to, 76
Declension middle/passive indicative, 77-78
definition of, 20 uses of, 79
first declension, 30-32 Impersonal verbs, 132-133
second declension, 23-24 Indicative mood, 14
third declension, 102-108 Indirect object, 14, 21
Defective verbs,117 Indirect speech, 132-133
Deponent verbs Infinitive,
definition of, 70 definition of, 128
imperfect indicative of eijmiv, 78-79 forms of, 128-129
in aorist tense, 98 uses of, 129-132
in future tense, 83 Inflection, 12
in imperfect tense, 78 Intransitive verbs, 14-15
in infinitive, 174 Kind of action (aspect), 13
Diaeresis, 7 Linking verbs, 54
Dipthongs, 4-5 Liquid verbs, 124
Direct object, 14, 22 Middle voice
in cases other than the accusative, forms of, 66
70-71 introduction to, 65-66
Divine passive, 65 uses of the middle voice, 66-67
Elision, 7, 46 Mood
Enclitics definition of, 14
accents on, 212-213 summary of the moods, 176
definition of, 51, 212 Moveable n, 16
Finite verbs, 128 Negatives, 60
Future tense double negatives, 166
active indicative, 82-83 in questions, 183
Index 257
Neuter plural subject with singular Plural neuter subject, 60

verb, 43 Predicate, 11-12
Nouns, 20 Predicate nominative, 54
Number, 14, 22 Predicate position, 39
Numerals, 185-186 Prepositions
Optative mood, 167-168 accents on, 46
Paradigm, 15 adverbial prepositions, 45
Parsing definition of, 44
definition of, 17 elision in, 46
of deponent verbs, 70 objects of, 44
of infinitives, 133 prepositional phrases, 44
of nouns, 25 translation of, 46
of participles, 141-142 uses of, 44
of pronouns, 53 with compound verbs, 45
of verbs, 17 with the article, 45
Participles Present tense
aorist participles, 146-150 active indicative, 15
introduction to, 136 middle indicative, 66-67
of contract verbs, 137, 139 present indicative of eijmiv, 54-56
perfect participles, 154-155 passive indicative, 64
present participle of eijmiv, 138 uses of, 17
present participles, 136-139 Primary tenses, 15
uses of participles, 139-141, 150, Principal parts of verbs, 17, 85, 90,
155-156 96-97, 112, 116-117
Particles, 60 Proclitics
Parts of speech, 12 accents on, 212
Passive voice definition of, 26, 212
forms of, 64 Pronouns
introduction to, 13, 63-64 definition of, 50
uses of, 64-65 demonstrative, 58-60
Perfect tense indefinite, 183
active indicative, 112-113 indefinite relative, 182
introduction to, 114 interrogative, 182-183
middle/passive indicative, 113-114 negative, 185
uses of the perfect tense, 114-115 personal, 50-53
Periphrastic constructions, 157-158 possessive, 185
Person, 14 reciprocal, 183
Phrases, 12 reflexive, 184
Pluperfect tense relative, 180-181
active indicative, 115-116 special use of aujtov~, 52-53
introduction to, 115 Punctuation marks, 7
middle passive indicative, 116 Questions, 17
258 Index
expecting yes or no answer, uses of the subjunctive, 165-166

183 Substantives, 11
punctuation of, 25 Syllables, 8, 211
Reduplication, 112, 196 Tense, 13
Secondary tenses, 15 Time of action, 13
Second perfect, 113, 154 Transitive verbs, 14
Sibilants, 6 There is . . . construction, 55
Subject, 11, 21 Verbs, 12
Subjunctive mood Voice, 13
forms of, 162-164 Vowels, 4
introduction to, 162 Word order, 24-25
present subjunctive of eijmiv, 165 Writing Greek letters, 3-4

2002 (Merritt) NTG 4 The Laymen

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2002 (Merritt) NTG 4 The Laymen

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HAMILTON BOOKS

4501 Forbes Blvd., Suite 200, Lanham, MD

New Testament Greek for Laymen: An

ABOUT THIS BOOK

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

THREE CONVENIENT WAYS TO ORDER:

University Press of America, Inc.

All rights reserved

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

best friend and helpmeet

1. The Greek Alphabet 1

26. -mi Conjugation Verbs 195

Subject Index 255

T here are a number of excellent grammars available to the beginning

verses as homework. Also, in some cases only English translations of

T he ancient Greek language consisted of a number of dialects that

1) Orthography, from the Greek words meaning to write cor-

2) Morphology, from the Greek words meaning the shape of

3) Syntax, from the Greek word meaning to arrange together,

The study of New Testament Greek can be an important addition to

1) When Jesus says in Mt. 26:27, Drink ye all of it, (KJV)

2) In 1 Jn. 3:9, when John says Whoever is born of God doth

3) In Mt. 6:13, why do some English versions say deliver us

4) In James 2:14, when James asks, Can faith save him?

The mention of context brings us to the final point of this intro-

The Greek Alphabet

Lower Case Upper Case Name Pronunciation

a A alpha a as in father (long)

b B beta b as in Bible

g G gamma g as in God (1)

(1) Gamma is always pronounced hard as in God, and never soft, as in

d D delta d as in dog

e E epsilon e as in pet

z Z zeta dz as in adz or

h H eta e as in obey

q Q theta th as in thing

i I iota i as in machine (long)

k K kappa k as in kitten

l L lambda l as in light

o O omicron o as in hot

r R rho r as in river

s/~ (3) S sigma s as in sun

t T tau t as in tiger

(2) Zeta is pronounced z as in zone when it comes at the beginning of a

u U upsilon u as in cute (long)

f F phi ph as in phone

c C chi ch as in chemical (4)

y Y psi ps as in taps

w W omega o as in note

1.2 Writing Greek Letters

1. The following letters are written on the line:

1.3 Greek Vowels and Diphthongs

ui ui as in suite or quit

Greek has another group of diphthongs, sometimes called improper

1.4 Greek Consonants

These consonants are termed liquid because they are pronounced

This group of consonants is further divided according to class and

Class Smooth Middle Rough

Greek consonants are grouped by class, according to how they are

Sibilant consonants are pronounced with an s sound. z x, and y

1.5 Breathing Marks

which breathing mark is used. This must be learned as part of vocabu-

1.6 Punctuation Marks

1) Orthography, from the Greek words meaning to write cor-

2) Morphology, from the Greek words meaning the shape of

3) Syntax, from the Greek word meaning to arrange together,

1) When Jesus says in Mt. 26:27, Drink ye all of it, (KJV)

2) In 1 Jn. 3:9, when John says Whoever is born of God doth

3) In Mt. 6:13, why do some English versions say deliver us

4) In James 2:14, when James asks, Can faith save him?

The mention of context brings us to the final point of this intro-

a A alpha a as in father (long)

b B beta b as in Bible

g G gamma g as in God (1)

d D delta d as in dog

e E epsilon e as in pet

z Z zeta dz as in adz or

h H eta e as in obey

q Q theta th as in thing

i I iota i as in machine (long)

k K kappa k as in kitten

l L lambda l as in light

o O omicron o as in hot

r R rho r as in river

s/~ (3) S sigma s as in sun

t T tau t as in tiger

(2) Zeta is pronounced z as in zone when it comes at the beginning of a

u U upsilon u as in cute (long)

f F phi ph as in phone

c C chi ch as in chemical (4)

y Y psi ps as in taps

w W omega o as in note

ui ui as in suite or quit

Greek has another group of diphthongs, sometimes called improper

These consonants are termed liquid because they are pronounced

Sibilant consonants are pronounced with an s sound. z x, and y

7) A n, called a moveable n is often added to the third person plural